The eschatological expectation of Matthew 24:34
-
Upload
independent -
Category
Documents
-
view
1 -
download
0
Transcript of The eschatological expectation of Matthew 24:34
Graham Stevenson Kings College London MA dissertation September 2014
The eschatological expectation of Matthew 2434
Abstract
The nature and timing of the eschatological expectation in Mt 2434 has been much
debated This paper highlights internal evidence from Matthewrsquos eschatological
discourse (Mt 24-25) and wider Gospel which strongly supports an interpretation
where Matthewrsquos Jesus declares that the eschatological woes and apocalyptic parousia
will occur within the timeframe of his contemporary generation Crucially whether
or not the ambiguous phrase πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) includes lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo (v 30) lsquothe comingrsquo is tied to that generation This interpretation of the
nature and timing of Mt 2434 is further supported by external evidence from
elsewhere in the NT from the OT (especially the book of Daniel) and from post-
biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related writings Notably it is Matthewrsquos redactional
changes to the Markan discourse which make this interpretation of Mt 2434 beyond
reasonable doubt Since these changed verses clarify rather than alter the sense of
their Markan parallels the Matthean eschatological discourse is suggested to be the
interpretive key for the shorter and less clear Markan discourse such that Mk 1330
like Mt 2434 predicts an imminent apocalyptic end
Introduction
Debate and speculation over the nature and timing of the end has been a feature of
Christian eschatology ever since the days of those whom the Evangelists described as
lsquofalse prophetsrsquo and lsquofalse Messiahsrsquo In considering Mt 2434 this paper seeks to
1
understand the eschatological expectations of the redactor of Matthewrsquos gospel In
this verse Jesus declares lsquoTruly I tell you this generation (γενεὰ) will not pass away
until all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) have taken placersquo As Ulrich Luz notes lsquountil
well into the eighteenth century there were essentially two competing types of
interpretation of [Mt 2434]rsquo The first understands γενεὰ to mean lsquogenerationrsquo and 1
πάντα ταῦτα to refer to events up to and including the destruction of Jerusalem The
second considers that πάντα ταῦτα includes reference to the end-time parousia but
saves Jesus from error by broadening the definition of γενεὰ It was Hermann
Reimarus (followed by Johannes Weiss and Albert Schweitzer) who first heightened
the debate over this verse by concluding that Jesus mistakenly expected the end-time
parousia within the lifetime of his contemporaries 2
The exploration of the eschatological expectation contained within Mt 2434 will
begin with a textual analysis of the verse In particular this will seek to resolve the
questions over the meaning of γενεὰ and the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα In the case
of the latter this will involve considering the function of v 34 in the wider context of
the pericope of which it is a part the eschatological discourse of Mt 24-25 This will
raise subsidiary questions over the relationship between the two main elements of the
eschatological discourse the period of tribulation and lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo (hereafter lsquothe comingrsquo) Given that v 34 apparently expresses timing 3
expectations in concrete terms it is also necessary to consider the relationship
between this verse and v 36 in which Jesus admits ignorance regarding lsquothat day and
Luz 1989 2091
Reimarus in Talbert 1970 218-222
NB due to debate around the meaning of lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo this phrase has been abbre3 -viated above to lsquothe comingrsquo and not to lsquothe parousiarsquo
2
hourrsquo Furthermore comment will be made about the recurrent motifs of nearness
delay and watching
Having considered the timing expectations in v 34 it is necessary to consider the
nature of Matthewrsquos eschatological expectation contained in this verse In particular
if lsquoall these thingsrsquo includes lsquothe comingrsquo what is the nature of this coming
In conclusion this paper will present an interpretation of Mt 2434 and consider how
this relates to the interpretation of Markrsquos eschatological discourse upon which Mt
24 is heavily dependent
Rationale
Each of the Synoptic Gospels contains a parallel version of the eschatological
discourse and in recent years the Markan version has attracted the greatest attention
This perhaps reflects the popularity of Markan priority in accounting for the Synoptic
problem which thus makes Markrsquos text the most original Against the trend this 4
paper is deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse as an early and
potentially illuminating interpretation of the redacted Markan text Matthew is
preferred to Luke since Matthewrsquos text is closer to the Markan discourse only
departing significantly from Mark with the additional material (Mt 2437-2546) A
similar study of Luke 2132 would be of great interest but demands more attention
than the limited words space available here While focused on Matthew arguments
from the interpretation of Mark 13 can be (and are) applied to Matthewrsquos text given
Indeed Matthew and Mark have particularly been the focus at times when these Gospels were each 4
understood to be the earliest Beasley-Murray 1993 2-33
their close parallels Where interpretations of Matthew have their basis in arguments
from Mark consideration will be given to Markrsquos text and relevant differences will be
noted
This paper is not a full exegesis of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse but in
exploring the interpretation of Mt 2434 is focused on the nature and timing of the
eschatological perspective that discourse contains
Methodology
The approach of this paper is fundamentally historical-grammatical in that it attempts
to give the best account of the meaning intended by the final redactor (hereafter
lsquoMatthewrsquo) of the commonly accepted Greek text for Matthewrsquos eschatological
discourse This aim means that questions regarding the authenticity of Jesus logia 5
and questions relating to the source-criticism of the text are considered to be
secondary Regarding authenticity it is not as important (to this study) whether Jesus
said what he is recorded to have said as it is important that Matthew recorded that he
said it Regarding the speculative endeavour of source-criticism this paper is content
to make the assumption that Matthew constructed his discourse with intentionality
and that he was to some extent critical of the sources which he used and did not
simply include sayings which didnrsquot serve his rhetorical purpose and flow
This historical-grammatical criticism of Mt 2434 will draw on a number of different
approaches In the first instance it will involve a close reading of the verse and its
context in the wider discourse Exploring the nature of the eschatological
Novum Testamentum Graece (Stuttgart Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft 27th edn 1993)5
4
expectations will involve drawing on rhetorical-critical studies which seek to account
for Matthewrsquos parenesis and also form-critical studies which explore whether
Matthewrsquos discourse can rightly be described as lsquoapocalypticrsquo This study is not a
redactional analysis but rather considers Matthewrsquos discourse in its own terms
However in conclusion the significance of a number of Matthewrsquos redactional
changes to Markrsquos prior version will be highlighted and redactional-criticism will be
suggested as a potential key to interpreting Mark 13
5
PART I THE ESCHATOLOGICAL TIMING OF Mt 2434
ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν ὅτι οὐ microὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται
Truly I tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
place
This emphatic statement of Jesus serves as the application to the brief parable of the
fig tree in the preceding verse and appears alongside another Jesus logia (v 35) that
lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but my words will not pass awayrsquo As Luz notes
the common catchword in these two sayings is lsquowill [not] pass awayrsquo and of the two
sayings lsquothe emphasis is on the amen saying of v 34 v 35 serves as corroborationrsquo 6
The interpretation of the eschatological timing in v 34 has been disputed principally
according to debates around the meaning of ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη and πάντα ταῦτα
1a) the meaning of γενεὰ
As early as the 5th century γενεὰ has been interpreted as other than simply
lsquogenerationrsquo (taken to mean lsquoall of the people born and living at about the same time
regarded collectivelyrsquo) For Jerome and others after him ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη referred to 7
the Jewish people in general As such the continuing existence of the Jewish people 8
serves as an assurance that the parousia is yet to come Alternatively γενεὰ has been
understood to refer to the church to faithless or to evil people In each case γενεὰ 9 10
Luz 1989 2076
This is the first meaning in the current Oxford English Dictionary7
Luz 1989 209 nt 19 gives references from Jerome to Zwingli8
Especially in the Eastern tradition Cf John Chrysostom Homily LXXVII available here lthttp9
wwwccelorgccelschaffnpnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt
Cf Schweizer E 1976 457-8 Morris 1992 612 Gundry 199449110
6
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
understand the eschatological expectations of the redactor of Matthewrsquos gospel In
this verse Jesus declares lsquoTruly I tell you this generation (γενεὰ) will not pass away
until all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) have taken placersquo As Ulrich Luz notes lsquountil
well into the eighteenth century there were essentially two competing types of
interpretation of [Mt 2434]rsquo The first understands γενεὰ to mean lsquogenerationrsquo and 1
πάντα ταῦτα to refer to events up to and including the destruction of Jerusalem The
second considers that πάντα ταῦτα includes reference to the end-time parousia but
saves Jesus from error by broadening the definition of γενεὰ It was Hermann
Reimarus (followed by Johannes Weiss and Albert Schweitzer) who first heightened
the debate over this verse by concluding that Jesus mistakenly expected the end-time
parousia within the lifetime of his contemporaries 2
The exploration of the eschatological expectation contained within Mt 2434 will
begin with a textual analysis of the verse In particular this will seek to resolve the
questions over the meaning of γενεὰ and the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα In the case
of the latter this will involve considering the function of v 34 in the wider context of
the pericope of which it is a part the eschatological discourse of Mt 24-25 This will
raise subsidiary questions over the relationship between the two main elements of the
eschatological discourse the period of tribulation and lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo (hereafter lsquothe comingrsquo) Given that v 34 apparently expresses timing 3
expectations in concrete terms it is also necessary to consider the relationship
between this verse and v 36 in which Jesus admits ignorance regarding lsquothat day and
Luz 1989 2091
Reimarus in Talbert 1970 218-222
NB due to debate around the meaning of lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo this phrase has been abbre3 -viated above to lsquothe comingrsquo and not to lsquothe parousiarsquo
2
hourrsquo Furthermore comment will be made about the recurrent motifs of nearness
delay and watching
Having considered the timing expectations in v 34 it is necessary to consider the
nature of Matthewrsquos eschatological expectation contained in this verse In particular
if lsquoall these thingsrsquo includes lsquothe comingrsquo what is the nature of this coming
In conclusion this paper will present an interpretation of Mt 2434 and consider how
this relates to the interpretation of Markrsquos eschatological discourse upon which Mt
24 is heavily dependent
Rationale
Each of the Synoptic Gospels contains a parallel version of the eschatological
discourse and in recent years the Markan version has attracted the greatest attention
This perhaps reflects the popularity of Markan priority in accounting for the Synoptic
problem which thus makes Markrsquos text the most original Against the trend this 4
paper is deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse as an early and
potentially illuminating interpretation of the redacted Markan text Matthew is
preferred to Luke since Matthewrsquos text is closer to the Markan discourse only
departing significantly from Mark with the additional material (Mt 2437-2546) A
similar study of Luke 2132 would be of great interest but demands more attention
than the limited words space available here While focused on Matthew arguments
from the interpretation of Mark 13 can be (and are) applied to Matthewrsquos text given
Indeed Matthew and Mark have particularly been the focus at times when these Gospels were each 4
understood to be the earliest Beasley-Murray 1993 2-33
their close parallels Where interpretations of Matthew have their basis in arguments
from Mark consideration will be given to Markrsquos text and relevant differences will be
noted
This paper is not a full exegesis of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse but in
exploring the interpretation of Mt 2434 is focused on the nature and timing of the
eschatological perspective that discourse contains
Methodology
The approach of this paper is fundamentally historical-grammatical in that it attempts
to give the best account of the meaning intended by the final redactor (hereafter
lsquoMatthewrsquo) of the commonly accepted Greek text for Matthewrsquos eschatological
discourse This aim means that questions regarding the authenticity of Jesus logia 5
and questions relating to the source-criticism of the text are considered to be
secondary Regarding authenticity it is not as important (to this study) whether Jesus
said what he is recorded to have said as it is important that Matthew recorded that he
said it Regarding the speculative endeavour of source-criticism this paper is content
to make the assumption that Matthew constructed his discourse with intentionality
and that he was to some extent critical of the sources which he used and did not
simply include sayings which didnrsquot serve his rhetorical purpose and flow
This historical-grammatical criticism of Mt 2434 will draw on a number of different
approaches In the first instance it will involve a close reading of the verse and its
context in the wider discourse Exploring the nature of the eschatological
Novum Testamentum Graece (Stuttgart Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft 27th edn 1993)5
4
expectations will involve drawing on rhetorical-critical studies which seek to account
for Matthewrsquos parenesis and also form-critical studies which explore whether
Matthewrsquos discourse can rightly be described as lsquoapocalypticrsquo This study is not a
redactional analysis but rather considers Matthewrsquos discourse in its own terms
However in conclusion the significance of a number of Matthewrsquos redactional
changes to Markrsquos prior version will be highlighted and redactional-criticism will be
suggested as a potential key to interpreting Mark 13
5
PART I THE ESCHATOLOGICAL TIMING OF Mt 2434
ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν ὅτι οὐ microὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται
Truly I tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
place
This emphatic statement of Jesus serves as the application to the brief parable of the
fig tree in the preceding verse and appears alongside another Jesus logia (v 35) that
lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but my words will not pass awayrsquo As Luz notes
the common catchword in these two sayings is lsquowill [not] pass awayrsquo and of the two
sayings lsquothe emphasis is on the amen saying of v 34 v 35 serves as corroborationrsquo 6
The interpretation of the eschatological timing in v 34 has been disputed principally
according to debates around the meaning of ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη and πάντα ταῦτα
1a) the meaning of γενεὰ
As early as the 5th century γενεὰ has been interpreted as other than simply
lsquogenerationrsquo (taken to mean lsquoall of the people born and living at about the same time
regarded collectivelyrsquo) For Jerome and others after him ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη referred to 7
the Jewish people in general As such the continuing existence of the Jewish people 8
serves as an assurance that the parousia is yet to come Alternatively γενεὰ has been
understood to refer to the church to faithless or to evil people In each case γενεὰ 9 10
Luz 1989 2076
This is the first meaning in the current Oxford English Dictionary7
Luz 1989 209 nt 19 gives references from Jerome to Zwingli8
Especially in the Eastern tradition Cf John Chrysostom Homily LXXVII available here lthttp9
wwwccelorgccelschaffnpnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt
Cf Schweizer E 1976 457-8 Morris 1992 612 Gundry 199449110
6
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
hourrsquo Furthermore comment will be made about the recurrent motifs of nearness
delay and watching
Having considered the timing expectations in v 34 it is necessary to consider the
nature of Matthewrsquos eschatological expectation contained in this verse In particular
if lsquoall these thingsrsquo includes lsquothe comingrsquo what is the nature of this coming
In conclusion this paper will present an interpretation of Mt 2434 and consider how
this relates to the interpretation of Markrsquos eschatological discourse upon which Mt
24 is heavily dependent
Rationale
Each of the Synoptic Gospels contains a parallel version of the eschatological
discourse and in recent years the Markan version has attracted the greatest attention
This perhaps reflects the popularity of Markan priority in accounting for the Synoptic
problem which thus makes Markrsquos text the most original Against the trend this 4
paper is deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse as an early and
potentially illuminating interpretation of the redacted Markan text Matthew is
preferred to Luke since Matthewrsquos text is closer to the Markan discourse only
departing significantly from Mark with the additional material (Mt 2437-2546) A
similar study of Luke 2132 would be of great interest but demands more attention
than the limited words space available here While focused on Matthew arguments
from the interpretation of Mark 13 can be (and are) applied to Matthewrsquos text given
Indeed Matthew and Mark have particularly been the focus at times when these Gospels were each 4
understood to be the earliest Beasley-Murray 1993 2-33
their close parallels Where interpretations of Matthew have their basis in arguments
from Mark consideration will be given to Markrsquos text and relevant differences will be
noted
This paper is not a full exegesis of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse but in
exploring the interpretation of Mt 2434 is focused on the nature and timing of the
eschatological perspective that discourse contains
Methodology
The approach of this paper is fundamentally historical-grammatical in that it attempts
to give the best account of the meaning intended by the final redactor (hereafter
lsquoMatthewrsquo) of the commonly accepted Greek text for Matthewrsquos eschatological
discourse This aim means that questions regarding the authenticity of Jesus logia 5
and questions relating to the source-criticism of the text are considered to be
secondary Regarding authenticity it is not as important (to this study) whether Jesus
said what he is recorded to have said as it is important that Matthew recorded that he
said it Regarding the speculative endeavour of source-criticism this paper is content
to make the assumption that Matthew constructed his discourse with intentionality
and that he was to some extent critical of the sources which he used and did not
simply include sayings which didnrsquot serve his rhetorical purpose and flow
This historical-grammatical criticism of Mt 2434 will draw on a number of different
approaches In the first instance it will involve a close reading of the verse and its
context in the wider discourse Exploring the nature of the eschatological
Novum Testamentum Graece (Stuttgart Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft 27th edn 1993)5
4
expectations will involve drawing on rhetorical-critical studies which seek to account
for Matthewrsquos parenesis and also form-critical studies which explore whether
Matthewrsquos discourse can rightly be described as lsquoapocalypticrsquo This study is not a
redactional analysis but rather considers Matthewrsquos discourse in its own terms
However in conclusion the significance of a number of Matthewrsquos redactional
changes to Markrsquos prior version will be highlighted and redactional-criticism will be
suggested as a potential key to interpreting Mark 13
5
PART I THE ESCHATOLOGICAL TIMING OF Mt 2434
ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν ὅτι οὐ microὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται
Truly I tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
place
This emphatic statement of Jesus serves as the application to the brief parable of the
fig tree in the preceding verse and appears alongside another Jesus logia (v 35) that
lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but my words will not pass awayrsquo As Luz notes
the common catchword in these two sayings is lsquowill [not] pass awayrsquo and of the two
sayings lsquothe emphasis is on the amen saying of v 34 v 35 serves as corroborationrsquo 6
The interpretation of the eschatological timing in v 34 has been disputed principally
according to debates around the meaning of ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη and πάντα ταῦτα
1a) the meaning of γενεὰ
As early as the 5th century γενεὰ has been interpreted as other than simply
lsquogenerationrsquo (taken to mean lsquoall of the people born and living at about the same time
regarded collectivelyrsquo) For Jerome and others after him ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη referred to 7
the Jewish people in general As such the continuing existence of the Jewish people 8
serves as an assurance that the parousia is yet to come Alternatively γενεὰ has been
understood to refer to the church to faithless or to evil people In each case γενεὰ 9 10
Luz 1989 2076
This is the first meaning in the current Oxford English Dictionary7
Luz 1989 209 nt 19 gives references from Jerome to Zwingli8
Especially in the Eastern tradition Cf John Chrysostom Homily LXXVII available here lthttp9
wwwccelorgccelschaffnpnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt
Cf Schweizer E 1976 457-8 Morris 1992 612 Gundry 199449110
6
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
their close parallels Where interpretations of Matthew have their basis in arguments
from Mark consideration will be given to Markrsquos text and relevant differences will be
noted
This paper is not a full exegesis of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse but in
exploring the interpretation of Mt 2434 is focused on the nature and timing of the
eschatological perspective that discourse contains
Methodology
The approach of this paper is fundamentally historical-grammatical in that it attempts
to give the best account of the meaning intended by the final redactor (hereafter
lsquoMatthewrsquo) of the commonly accepted Greek text for Matthewrsquos eschatological
discourse This aim means that questions regarding the authenticity of Jesus logia 5
and questions relating to the source-criticism of the text are considered to be
secondary Regarding authenticity it is not as important (to this study) whether Jesus
said what he is recorded to have said as it is important that Matthew recorded that he
said it Regarding the speculative endeavour of source-criticism this paper is content
to make the assumption that Matthew constructed his discourse with intentionality
and that he was to some extent critical of the sources which he used and did not
simply include sayings which didnrsquot serve his rhetorical purpose and flow
This historical-grammatical criticism of Mt 2434 will draw on a number of different
approaches In the first instance it will involve a close reading of the verse and its
context in the wider discourse Exploring the nature of the eschatological
Novum Testamentum Graece (Stuttgart Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft 27th edn 1993)5
4
expectations will involve drawing on rhetorical-critical studies which seek to account
for Matthewrsquos parenesis and also form-critical studies which explore whether
Matthewrsquos discourse can rightly be described as lsquoapocalypticrsquo This study is not a
redactional analysis but rather considers Matthewrsquos discourse in its own terms
However in conclusion the significance of a number of Matthewrsquos redactional
changes to Markrsquos prior version will be highlighted and redactional-criticism will be
suggested as a potential key to interpreting Mark 13
5
PART I THE ESCHATOLOGICAL TIMING OF Mt 2434
ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν ὅτι οὐ microὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται
Truly I tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
place
This emphatic statement of Jesus serves as the application to the brief parable of the
fig tree in the preceding verse and appears alongside another Jesus logia (v 35) that
lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but my words will not pass awayrsquo As Luz notes
the common catchword in these two sayings is lsquowill [not] pass awayrsquo and of the two
sayings lsquothe emphasis is on the amen saying of v 34 v 35 serves as corroborationrsquo 6
The interpretation of the eschatological timing in v 34 has been disputed principally
according to debates around the meaning of ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη and πάντα ταῦτα
1a) the meaning of γενεὰ
As early as the 5th century γενεὰ has been interpreted as other than simply
lsquogenerationrsquo (taken to mean lsquoall of the people born and living at about the same time
regarded collectivelyrsquo) For Jerome and others after him ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη referred to 7
the Jewish people in general As such the continuing existence of the Jewish people 8
serves as an assurance that the parousia is yet to come Alternatively γενεὰ has been
understood to refer to the church to faithless or to evil people In each case γενεὰ 9 10
Luz 1989 2076
This is the first meaning in the current Oxford English Dictionary7
Luz 1989 209 nt 19 gives references from Jerome to Zwingli8
Especially in the Eastern tradition Cf John Chrysostom Homily LXXVII available here lthttp9
wwwccelorgccelschaffnpnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt
Cf Schweizer E 1976 457-8 Morris 1992 612 Gundry 199449110
6
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
expectations will involve drawing on rhetorical-critical studies which seek to account
for Matthewrsquos parenesis and also form-critical studies which explore whether
Matthewrsquos discourse can rightly be described as lsquoapocalypticrsquo This study is not a
redactional analysis but rather considers Matthewrsquos discourse in its own terms
However in conclusion the significance of a number of Matthewrsquos redactional
changes to Markrsquos prior version will be highlighted and redactional-criticism will be
suggested as a potential key to interpreting Mark 13
5
PART I THE ESCHATOLOGICAL TIMING OF Mt 2434
ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν ὅτι οὐ microὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται
Truly I tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
place
This emphatic statement of Jesus serves as the application to the brief parable of the
fig tree in the preceding verse and appears alongside another Jesus logia (v 35) that
lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but my words will not pass awayrsquo As Luz notes
the common catchword in these two sayings is lsquowill [not] pass awayrsquo and of the two
sayings lsquothe emphasis is on the amen saying of v 34 v 35 serves as corroborationrsquo 6
The interpretation of the eschatological timing in v 34 has been disputed principally
according to debates around the meaning of ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη and πάντα ταῦτα
1a) the meaning of γενεὰ
As early as the 5th century γενεὰ has been interpreted as other than simply
lsquogenerationrsquo (taken to mean lsquoall of the people born and living at about the same time
regarded collectivelyrsquo) For Jerome and others after him ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη referred to 7
the Jewish people in general As such the continuing existence of the Jewish people 8
serves as an assurance that the parousia is yet to come Alternatively γενεὰ has been
understood to refer to the church to faithless or to evil people In each case γενεὰ 9 10
Luz 1989 2076
This is the first meaning in the current Oxford English Dictionary7
Luz 1989 209 nt 19 gives references from Jerome to Zwingli8
Especially in the Eastern tradition Cf John Chrysostom Homily LXXVII available here lthttp9
wwwccelorgccelschaffnpnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt
Cf Schweizer E 1976 457-8 Morris 1992 612 Gundry 199449110
6
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
PART I THE ESCHATOLOGICAL TIMING OF Mt 2434
ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν ὅτι οὐ microὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται
Truly I tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
place
This emphatic statement of Jesus serves as the application to the brief parable of the
fig tree in the preceding verse and appears alongside another Jesus logia (v 35) that
lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but my words will not pass awayrsquo As Luz notes
the common catchword in these two sayings is lsquowill [not] pass awayrsquo and of the two
sayings lsquothe emphasis is on the amen saying of v 34 v 35 serves as corroborationrsquo 6
The interpretation of the eschatological timing in v 34 has been disputed principally
according to debates around the meaning of ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη and πάντα ταῦτα
1a) the meaning of γενεὰ
As early as the 5th century γενεὰ has been interpreted as other than simply
lsquogenerationrsquo (taken to mean lsquoall of the people born and living at about the same time
regarded collectivelyrsquo) For Jerome and others after him ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη referred to 7
the Jewish people in general As such the continuing existence of the Jewish people 8
serves as an assurance that the parousia is yet to come Alternatively γενεὰ has been
understood to refer to the church to faithless or to evil people In each case γενεὰ 9 10
Luz 1989 2076
This is the first meaning in the current Oxford English Dictionary7
Luz 1989 209 nt 19 gives references from Jerome to Zwingli8
Especially in the Eastern tradition Cf John Chrysostom Homily LXXVII available here lthttp9
wwwccelorgccelschaffnpnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt
Cf Schweizer E 1976 457-8 Morris 1992 612 Gundry 199449110
6
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
is given a general referent rather than the specificity which would mean a reference to
contemporaries This generalising tendency somewhat dampens the emphatic nature
of Jesus statement in v 34 with its ἀmicroὴν λέγω ὑmicroῖν However the main reason that
these interpretations are commonly doubted relates to Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ and its
cognates elsewhere in his gospel
According to Luz lsquoin the other cases where it is used γενεὰ clearly means
ldquogenerationrdquorsquo Additionally Luz notes that the Hebrew דור which is translated γενεὰ 11
in the LXX means primarily lsquohuman age generationrsquo Likewise for W D Davies 12
and Dale C Allison lsquoγενεὰ plainly refers to Jesusrsquo contemporaries in 1116 1239
41 42 45 164 and 1717 as well as close parallel in 2336rsquo This view is 13
commonly shared among modern scholars and by analogy γενεὰ in Mt 2434 is also
understood to be lsquogenerationrsquo (as in specifically that generation) In actual fact a
survey of the other uses of γενεὰ in Matthew shows that this case is overstated In the
majority of cases a general sense for γενεὰ fits as well as a specific reference to those
living at that time Descriptions such as lsquoan evil and adulterous generationrsquo (Mt
1239 164) have the effect of generalising the reference and the characteristics
attributed to the γενεὰ in Mt 1116 and 1717 are not seemingly particular to those
people living at the time of Jesus as opposed to any another generation The
exceptions which do point to a specific generation are Mt 2336 which gives an
analogous eschatological warning to Mt 2434 and Matthewrsquos genealogy which
indisputably relates γενεαὶ to specific lsquogenerationsrsquo
Luz 1989 20811
Luz 2001 14812
Davies and Allison 1997 36713
7
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Word studies on γενεὰ are not sufficient to determine whether this word has a specific
or general referent It is possible although perhaps unlikely that Matthew uses γενεὰ
in different ways in different contexts sometimes speaking in general terms and
sometimes referring specifically to a particular lsquogenerationrsquo However while word 14
studies should not result in saying γενεὰ lsquoclearlyrsquo or lsquoplainlyrsquo means lsquogenerationrsquo 15 16
this interpretation is the most likely and is supported by other evidence Firstly the
discourse is launched in response to a question prompted by a statement about the
destruction of the Temple This event is arguably the climax of the tribulations and 17
did occur within a generation of Jesusrsquo ministry The timeframe of a generation thus
fits neatly with the way the discourse is rhetorically framed Secondly a lsquothis
generationrsquo timeframe makes the discourse especially pertinent to Matthewrsquos
audience Thirdly for those who include lsquothe comingrsquo within πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these
thingsrsquo) expected within ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη Mt 1628 makes the same substantive points
as Mt 2434 but worded differently and in a way which confirms the understanding of
γενεὰ In this case ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (2434) is equivalent to τινες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων 18
(lsquosome standing herersquo) (1628) and so has a specific rather than general referent
NB from the perspective of an apocalyptic reading the general and the specific overlap significantly 14
For instance Mt 2434 could be a statement directed against the lsquoracersquo of the Jews and at the same time the discourse and genre indicates an imminent expectation of the end (without the lsquothis genera-tionrsquo statement)
Luz 1989 20815
Davies and Allison 1997 36716
See below17
Mt 1023 provides further evidence of Matthewrsquos imminent expectation18
8
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
1b) the meaning of πάντα ταῦτα
Two main positions have been argued with regard to the scope of the antecedent of
πάντα ταῦτα (lsquoall these thingsrsquo) As George R Beasley-Murray notes lsquothe majority
of exegetes through the centuries to the present day have viewed Mark 1330 [ Mt
2434] as relating to the events leading up to and including the parousia of Christrsquo 19
In this case lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers the whole discourse up to this point However for
other scholars lsquoall these thingsrsquo excludes lsquothe comingrsquo and refers instead to the
tribulations which culminated in the destruction of the Jerusalem in 70 CE 20
πάντα ταῦτα excluding lsquothe comingrsquo
A commonly held basis for excluding lsquothe comingrsquo from πάντα ταῦτα (v 34) involves
two steps firstly it makes sense to consider that the antecedent to πάντα ταῦτα is the
same as that for πάντα ταῦτα in the previous verse and secondly the πάντα ταῦτα in
this verse (v 33) evidently does not include lsquothe comingrsquo In Mt 2433 we read
So also when you see all these things (πάντα ταῦτα) you know that ithe is
near (ἐγγύς ἐστίν) at the very gates
As Edward Adams notes ἐγγύς ἐστίν refers either to lsquothe coming of the Son of man
that is the parousia or the Son of man in his comingrsquo As such it is clearly illogical 21
for the πάντα ταῦτα of v 29 to include lsquothe comingrsquo as a sign that lsquothe comingrsquo is to
come Furthermore Matthewrsquos redaction of Mark 1329-30 arguably tightens the
association between the two verses since in Mark there are two different phrases that
Beasley-Murray 1993 44319
This view was implied as early as the 3rd or 4th century in the Pseudo-Clementine Homily III sect15 20
available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt Calvin influentially also held the view that Jesus was predicting the destruction of Jerusalem within a generation available here lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt
Adams 2007 165 Commenting on Mk 132921
9
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
are seemingly related (ταῦτα v 29 and ταῦτα πάντα v 30) whereas in Matthew these
are both πάντα ταῦτα It is thus plausible that πάντα ταῦτα in Mt 2434 shares the 22
antecedent with the same phrase in v 33 and so excludes lsquothe comingrsquo from its
semantic scope Accordingly the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo is associated only 23
with the tribulations and comment on the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo is deferred until v 36
where Jesus describes the unknowability of the timing of the end 24
The principle reason that the exclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo from v 34 is doubted is due to
the position of Mt 2432-35 after the section on lsquothe comingrsquo As Davies and Allison
note lsquothe placement of [v 34] after a prophecy of the parousia is suggestiversquo 25
Similarly Thomas R Hatina does not find the view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo in Mk
1330 excludes lsquothe comingrsquo persuasive lsquoin light of the natural progression in the
discourse (ie from crises to climax)rsquo If Matthew had intended that lsquothe comingrsquo 26
should not be associated with the timeframe of lsquothis generationrsquo not passing away then
vv 32-35 are located at a point that invites misreading This issue could potentially
be mitigated if the verses describing lsquothe comingrsquo (vv 29-31) could be shown to be
temporally dislocated from the flow of the discourse as Gustavo Martin has recently
attempted to show with recourse to the lsquoprocedural registerrsquo changes in the Markan
parallel However as Martin notes these procedural register changes are not evident
The additional lsquoπάνταrsquo of Mk 1330 is understood to add emphasis by underlining that without ex22 -ception all these things will take place within a generation
Beasley-Murray offers two further reasons to exclude the parousia from lsquoall these thingsrsquo of Mk 23
1330 One reason depends on a non-eschatological reading of the disciplesrsquo question (an argument which is unlikely for Mark and certainly doesnrsquot apply to Matthew) The other depends on the purport-ed purpose of the coming judgment on Jerusalem (but this does not exclude the possibility of the parousia as the climax of the judgment) Beasley-Murray 1993446-8
Contra Werner G Kuumlmmelrsquos unfair criticism that for such a reading there is no lsquopronouncement 24
about the actual moment of the end which alone is of importancersquo Kuumlmmel 1957 60
Davies and Allison 1997 367-825
Hatina 1996 52 Also Gundry 1993 746-4726
10
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
in Matthewrsquos redaction Moreover contrary to Martinrsquos conclusion even if this is 27
the case for Mark it does not follow that procedural register change necessarily opens
lsquoa new temporal horizon in the speechrsquo It is more likely that textual variations 28
within Markrsquos (and consequently Matthewrsquos) discourse (including the switch to the
third person in the section on lsquothe comingrsquo) reflect different sources which were
nevertheless weaved into a consistent time frame running through the discourse 29
While the layout of the discourse may incline towards the inclusion of lsquothe comingrsquo in
πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 the alternative reading remains valid and logical For those who
maintain that πάντα ταῦτα excludes lsquothe comingrsquo there are two further related
questions what then does πάντα ταῦτα include and what difference does this make to
eschatological timing expectations
If not all the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo what would πάντα ταῦτα include
If πάντα ταῦτα does not include lsquothe comingrsquo the divisions in the discourse on the
tribulations are points which may indicate what is included in lsquoall these thingsrsquo
Davies and Allison consider that the period of tribulation described by Jesus is
subdivided into three sections which get progressively longer more intense and
focused on the Holy Land These three are described as
a) The beginning of the woes (4-8) (focused on the world)
b) The intensification of the woes (9-14) (focused on the church)
Martin 2009 46127
Ibid28
Beasley-Murray notes that lsquothe first observation to make on this description of the parousia [Mk 29
1324-27] is that it is a fragmentrsquo Beasley-Murray 1993 422 In his work of 1993 Beasley-Murray gives a comprehensive review of more than 100 years of source-criticism
11
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
c) The climax of the woes (15-28) (focused on Judea) 30
With regard to this division the two most likely candidates for the antecedent to lsquoall
these thingsrsquo (if excluding lsquothe comingrsquo) are vv 4-14 and vv 4-28 In the latter case
all the tribulations are expected before that generation passes away This view has the
advantage that the woes described in vv 15-28 appear to correspond to the historical
events leading up to and including the destruction of the Temple These events did 31
take place within the lifetime of Jesusrsquo contemporary generation Alternatively the
view that lsquoall these thingsrsquo refers to vv 4-14 has the advantage that v 14 appears to
account for the delay of the end and that vv 15-28 are more difficult to separate
temporally from lsquothe comingrsquo In v 14 Jesus announces that lsquothis good news of the
kingdom will be proclaimed throughout the world as a testimony to all the nations
and then the end will comersquo A minority view endorsed by futurist readers considers
that this verse anticipates a future completion of the yet unfulfilled task of gospel
proclamation to all people groups on the earth before the parousia However the idea
that in v 14 mission lsquothroughout the worldrsquo (ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουmicroένῃ) before the end
implies a long delay for lsquothe comingrsquo neglects the widely held understanding that
Matthew would have considered this task nearly or already completed As Luz
notes lsquothe perspective is the same as in 1022-23 with the Israel mission Thus
Matthew means exactly the opposite of that interpretation of the church that indices
that the mission to the nations is still unfinishedrsquo 32
Davies and Allison 1997 326-730
Marcus 1992 44831
Luz 1989 195 nt 110 Col 123 suggests that Paul (or the author) considered that the gospel had 32
already been preached lsquoto every creature under heavenrsquo in his day (cf Rom 1519 23)12
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Of the two possibilities for an antecedent for lsquoall these thingsrsquo which excludes lsquothe
comingrsquo vv 4-28 is most likely Although the description of the tribulations in vv
15-28 does not explicitly mention the destruction of the Temple the language used is
highly suggestive of this event Matthewrsquos redaction makes the obvious reference to
the Temple in Mark explicit by expanding lsquothe desolating sacrilege (τὸ βδέλυγmicroα τῆς
ἐρηmicroώσεως) set up where it ought not to bersquo (Mk 1314) to lsquothe desolating sacrilege
standing in the holy place as was spoken of by the prophet Danielrsquo (Mt 2415) The
addition of both lsquothe holy placersquo and the reference to Daniel confirm that the Temple
is in view The former describes an area within the Temple and the latter relates lsquothe 33
desolating sacrilegersquo (Mt 2434) to the lsquoabomination that makes desolatersquo (Dan
1131) which Daniel sets in the Temple Furthermore this discourse is presented as 34
Jesusrsquo continuous response to the question of the disciples (Mt 243) which clearly
refers back to Jesusrsquo comments on the destruction of the Temple buildings The
argument that the destruction of the Temple features implicitly within the lsquowars and
rumours of warsrsquo makes little sense of way the discourse is introduced of the clear 35
allusion to the Temple in vv 15-28 and of the great significance of this event for
Judaism and early Christianity
Once the reference to the Temple is recognised it becomes highly implausible that this
part of the discourse would be referring to events in our future If Matthew was
written before 70 CE then the correspondence between his discourse and events in the
Contra Willi Marxsen who considers that Matthew in emphasising the prophetic origins of the 33
phrase is distancing the reference from the destruction of Jerusalem Marxsen 1969 199 Marxsenrsquos conclusions seem based on an a priori assumption that Matthew must be writing in a post-70 CE peri-od
The lsquoabomination that desolatesrsquo is also mentioned in Dan 927 and Dan 1211 Cf 1 Mac 15434
Nineham 1968 34335
13
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
first century are sufficient to consider that this aspect of the prediction is fulfilled 36
If Matthew was writing after 70 CE it is not plausible that he would have described
the tribulations involving the Temple as a prophecy of Jesus which did not refer to the
events of 70 CE Furthermore if Matthew had intended to record a prophecy of an
additional tribulation involving the Temple but after 70 CE it would have been
necessary to include an editorial note to that effect While there is an editorial note in
v 15 (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω lsquolet the reader understandrsquo) this hardly indicates
tribulations in Jerusalem after those in 70 CE This would be to suggest that Jesus in
response to a question from his disciples regarding the Temple gives a prophecy
which passes over the events of 70 CE in near silence only to predict tribulations in
Jerusalem in the distant future Furthermore Matthewrsquos phrase comes from the
Markan discourse which is widely understood to be pre-70 CE The most likely
interpretation of lsquolet the reader understandrsquo is as a cue to Mark and Matthewrsquos readers
that events they have witnessed subsequent to Jesusrsquo statements are the very ones
apparently predicted nearly 40 years previously 37
On the basis of the interpretation of v 14 and the Temple references in v15ff πάντα
ταῦτα (v 34) may perhaps not include lsquothe comingrsquo however it does include all the
tribulations from vv 4-28 The question that follows is what would this antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα mean for eschatological timing expectations
Josephus in Whiston 1892 Wars of the Jews Book VI36
Of the main contenders for the identity of the desolating sacrilege Adams favours the Zealots occu37 -pation of the Temple as their base in 67-68 CE Adams 2007 144 Alternatives include Caligularsquos de-mand for a statue in Temple (but this is too far back in history and known to have failed) or Titusrsquo entry and erection of the Roman standards (but this did not precede the destruction by any great length of time and would hardly serve as a warning to flee)
14
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Implications for timing
Notably if lsquothe comingrsquo is removed from the semantic scope of πάντα ταῦτα (Mt
2434) it does not negate the sense in Mt 2433 that lsquothe comingrsquo is near In fact by
identifying the two πάντα ταῦτα phrases this nearness becomes expressed in more
concrete terms it is to be near for Jesusrsquo contemporaries Combining the two verses
Jesus indicates that lsquowhen you see all these tribulations (that will all take place before
this generation passes away) then you will know that lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very
gatesrsquo This is the case for both Markrsquos and Matthewrsquos discourses
Adams identifies the πάντα ταῦτα of v 34 with that in v 33 and concludes lsquothe
catastrophic coming of the Son of man is not therefore tied to the time frame of a
generationrsquo However if πάντα ταῦτα refers to the preceding tribulations then lsquothe 38
comingrsquo does precisely become tied to the time frame of a generation since v 34 tells
us all the tribulations will take place within a generation and v 33 tells us that when
all these tribulations have been seen then lsquothe comingrsquo is near Any attempt to argue
for a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo needs to stretch the meaning of lsquonear at the very gatesrsquo in
a way that is especially implausible if it is to account for nearly 2000 years 39
Furthermore while Markrsquos discourse indicates not delay but temporal continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo Matthewrsquos redaction of the discourse
makes this continuity explicit
Matthew introduces the section on lsquothe comingrsquo with Εὐθέως δὲ microετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν
ἡmicroερῶν ἐκείνων (lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo) Matthewrsquos
Adams 2007 17138
James 59 offers a possible parallel here lsquothe Judge is standing at the doorsrsquo is an encouragement to 39
the readers to be patient in awaiting the parousia of Christ15
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
redactional addition of the word lsquoεὐθέωςrsquo indicates that lsquothe comingrsquo will follow
lsquoimmediatelyrsquo on from the tribulations Furthermore the use of both the definite
article τὴν in relation to suffering and the demonstrative pronoun ἐκείνων indicates
that lsquothe comingrsquo is to follow immediately after those particular woes previously
described rather than after a general indefinitely extending period of suffering
Consequently even if lsquoall these thingsrsquo does not include lsquothe comingrsquo it is clear that
the coming cannot be delayed when a) Jesusrsquo contemporaries will not pass away until
all the tribulations have taken place (Mt 2434) and b) lsquothe coming of the Son of
manrsquo will follow immediately after those tribulations (Mt 2429) Matthewrsquos addition
of εὐθέως means that in his discourse there is no difference regarding timing
expectations between the two understandings of the antecedent for lsquoall these
thingsrsquo (v 34) In this verse either Jesus explicitly states that lsquothe comingrsquo will be
within the generation of his contemporaries or Jesus implicitly states the same thing
Various scholars have found Markrsquos discourse to be more conducive to room for the
continuation of tribulations beyond the generation of Jesus and before lsquothe comingrsquo 40
However while Markrsquos discourse lacks the word εὐθέως it also indicates continuity
between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo As with the Matthean parallel reading 41
Mk 13 vv 29-30 together indicates that within a generation all the tribulations will
have taken place and at this point lsquothe comingrsquo is near at the very gates 42
Furthermore the clear first century setting to the tribulations of the Synoptic
Wenham 1982 127 Geddert 1989 229 Adams 2007 16540
As in Matthew a definite article and demonstrative pronoun link lsquothe comingrsquo to the previous tribula41 -tions (Mk 1324)
David Wenham argues for a delayed parousia in Mark and disingenuously suggests that after 70 CE 42
lsquothe period of desolation is indeterminatersquo or lsquoa period of trouble of uncertain lengthrsquo without also noting that the coming of the Son of man is near in relation to this time Wenham 1982 132-3
16
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
eschatological discourses (including being handed over to synagogues and governors
and references to the Temple destruction) does not fit with the idea of these
tribulations continuing through history
In relation to Markrsquos discourse Timothy J Geddert makes the odd statement that lsquoa
growing number of scholars argue that Markrsquos whole point at 1324a is to untie the
two events [the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo] forging a gap between themrsquo 43
Geddert himself considers that lsquoif the primary error of the false prophets (1321f) was
their false announcement of the parousia (a conclusion they would have based on the
fact of the tribulation) then Mark would be insisting the events are to be separated A
time gap between 1323 and 1324 would be affirmedrsquo Geddert is wrong to 44
conclude that what makes the false announcements of these prophets false is their
timing expectation As vv 21f indicate their announcements are false by virtue of
their mis-identification of the Messiah Instead what these verses indicate is that in
first century Judaea there was a common expectation of a Messianic adventsecond
advent - a view which the eschatological discourse does not contradict Geddert 45
reads Mk 1324 ( Mt 2429) as written in such a way as to be deliberately
ambiguous neither denying continuity nor discontinuity between the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo However his reasons for not denying discontinuity are weak and it 46
should be accepted that there is self-evidently continuity in Markrsquos discourse between
Geddert 1989 229 He backs up this claim by citing just one book without quotes or page numbers43
Ibid44
2 Pet 3 reflects the debate regarding the (non)appearance of Christ that was going on in the early 45
church Contra Adams 2005b 112-3 it is significant that the death of lsquothe Fathersrsquo that is given as a time marker (if lsquothe Fathersrsquo as OT Fathers were meant then the mention of their death is superfluous) and strongly suggests that there was an early expectation of Christrsquos return within a generation
Geddert 1989 23046
17
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
the two events It is a continuity that Matthew underlines in his redaction with the 47
addition of lsquoimmediatelyrsquo
Multiple focus
Since the discourse accommodates neither a long delay after the tribulations nor a
long delay within the tribulations the only way left to justify a delay in lsquothe comingrsquo
is some version of the idea of lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo In this case the discourse is a 48
prophecy which has a lsquodual focusrsquo and so can be already fulfilled in one sense without
that being the end of the scope of that prophecy The idea of dual focus can arguably
find precedence within the discourse itself Matthew has explicitly referenced the
prophet Daniel as the source for the idea of the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo and also quotes
Dan 713 in lsquothe Son of man comingrsquo (2430) It is possible that Matthew understood
Danielrsquos prophecy to have a focus on both the events relating to Antiochus Epiphanesrsquo
desecration of the Temple in the second century BCE (like most modern scholars) and
the events that Jesus was foretelling We cannot be certain however whether 49
Matthew considered Danielrsquos prophecy to have been previously fulfilled (at least in
part) with a further fulfilment to come or whether that prophecy for Matthew simply
awaited its single fulfilment in his future Given that Daniel seems to expect the end
of the age to come approximately three and a half years after lsquothe abomination that
As Adams notes lsquoThere is no indication of a temporal gap between the close of tribulation and what 47
is about to be described The events of vv 24-27 it must be presumed directly follow the time of dis-tressrsquo Adams 2007 146
Caird 1980 25848
If prophetic perspective in Matthewrsquos discourse expects a third fulfilment for this event it can actual49 -ly be described as lsquotriple focusrsquo R H Mounce suggests multiple fulfilment with a future parousia on this basis Mounce 1991 228 Also Gundry 1994 491 finds a basis for double fulfilment in Jesusrsquo fulfilment of previously fulfilled OT prophecies and in the particular example of Dan 12 evident here
18
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
makes desolatersquo it would have been simpler for Matthew to apply the whole
prophecy to his time 50
For G B Caird prophetic perspective is by intentional design whereas A M
Ambrozic suggests that it is an unintended prophetic consequence The latter view 51
makes better sense of the fact that it is the evidence of hindsight rather than the texts
themselves which require the notion of dual focus However the idea of
unintentional prophecy is particularly problematic with the eschatological discourses
because it is no ordinary prophet who is making the announcement Jesusrsquo admission
of ignorance in v 36 is Christologically difficult enough without having to also say
that in addition to having a recognised limit to his knowledge Jesus unwittingly
prophesied a distant future event in the knowledge that he did claim
By contrast Geddert attempts to tread a middle way and considers that lsquoMark should
not be thought of as a victim of the lsquoprophetic perspectiversquo but a master of it enabling
him to see two great events but deliberately painting a picture in such a way that
Markrsquos own ignorance of the temporal relationship between the events was passed on
to the readerrsquo Geddert strongly overstates the case for deliberate ambiguity in 52
Mark Markrsquos text makes sense as a clear coherent and consistent discourse without 53
Dan 1211-1250
Intentional design Caird 1980 258 Unintentional A M Ambrozic considers that dual focus is 51
unintentional stating that lsquothe prophetic perspective must not be imagined to imply that the prophets were somehow aware that their words would be fulfilled only in the distant futurersquo Ambrozic 1972 220-2
Geddert 1989 23452
It is as if Geddert has built a case for deliberate ambiguity by calling points of scholarly debate tex53 -tual ambiguities Geddert has added up enough unlikely interpretations to suggest that the text is inten-tionally ambiguous However interpretative debates are settled according to what is most probable and probabilities are fractions that should be multiplied rather than added - with diminishing effects
19
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
ambiguity or tension Furthermore while deliberate ambiguity is unlikely in Mark
the redactional clarifications of Matthew make it virtually impossible to argue in his
discourse Where the text indicates a chronologically progressing discourse which
proceeds immediately from the tribulations to lsquothe comingrsquo prophetic perspective is
unwarranted eisegesis to superimpose a second focus of prophecy - particularly if
doing so only makes sense of the text if Jesus was unaware that he was giving a dual
prophecy Furthermore dual perspective is particularly difficult to apply to
prophecies of the end of the age given that they naturally cannot have fulfilment (in
the strict sense of the word) more than once
1c) Mt 2434 in relation to Mt 2436
The progression of Matthewrsquos discourse the notion of nearness tied to the first
generation and the problems associated with recourse to prophetic perspective means
that it is very difficult to account for a long delay between the predicted tribulations
which seem evidently to describe events in the first century and lsquothe comingrsquo (where
this is understood as an age-ending parousia) Beasley-Murray exemplifies those
scholars who argue for a delay and end up relying on Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance
regarding lsquothat day and hourrsquo (Mk 1332 Mt 2436) to resolve the difficulties 54
What is the extent of Jesusrsquo apparent ignorance and how should v 34 and v 36 be
related
The first question regarding v 36 is what does the phrase τῆς ἡmicroέρας ἐκείνης καὶ
ὥρας (lsquothat day or hourrsquo) mean Does this phrase signify the end itself or does it refer
more specifically to the timing of the end If it does refer to timing does it reflect
Beasley-Murray 1993 458ff Wenham 1982 134f Adams 2007 17154
20
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
absolute ignorance (lsquothe comingrsquo could happen at any time at all) or does it reflect
relative ignorance on Jesusrsquo part (he does know that lsquothe comingrsquo will be within a
generation but doesnrsquot know the precise moment - literally the day or hour) As
Beasley-Murray notes lsquoin the literature of Israelrsquos prophets and apocalypticists either
term [lsquothethat dayrsquo or lsquothe hourrsquo] can denote the day of the Lord the time of Godrsquos
ldquocomingrdquo to enact judgment andor salvation among humankindrsquo This connotation 55
suggests that Jesusrsquo admission of ignorance regarding lsquothe time of Godrsquos comingrsquo is
absolute rather than meaning literally the day or hour (relative ignorance)
However while relating v 36 to OT references may support a non-literal reading of
lsquoday and hourrsquo the usage of these terms in the following verses which v 36
introduces indicates the opposite This section (Mt 2436 - 2546) includes
illustrations and exhortations (2437 - 2530) which preface three parables on the
theme of eschatological delay (2445 - 2530) Davies and Allison note that lsquoall three
concern the delay of the parousia preparedness for the end and recompense at the
great assize Within this section there are a number of keywords including lsquoknowrsquo 56
lsquodaysrsquo lsquohourrsquo lsquocomesrsquo lsquoSon of manrsquo and the parenetic admonition lsquowatchrsquo The use
of these keywords indicates that the words lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo literally refer to moments
in time rather than denoting lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Mt 2444 makes this clear and 57
also suggests the rhetorical purpose of v 36 lsquoTherefore you also must be ready for
the Son of Man is coming at an unexpected hourrsquo That the word lsquohourrsquo denotes a unit
of time and does not stand for lsquothe comingrsquo is clear from substituting lsquohourrsquo in v 44
Beasley-Murray 1993 457 Cf Ezek 302-3 Zeph 17-13 311-20 Zech 914-16 121-136 144-55
5 Isa 27
Davies and Allison 1997 37456
Cf Mt 2438-39 42 44 50 251357
21
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
with lsquothe comingrsquo or parousia This point is underlined in Mt 2513 where Jesus 58
states lsquoKeep awake therefore for you know neither the day nor the hourrsquo The
lsquoneitherhellip norrsquo makes it clear that lsquodayrsquo and lsquohourrsquo are not two ways of denoting one
event but should be read as signifying moments in time 59
The theme that runs through the section from v 36 is clear the timing of the end
cannot be calculated - contrary to the practice evidenced in some apocalyptic texts 60
The purpose of this theme is also clear Matthewrsquos audience need to watch and be
ready because the end will come unexpectedly The relationship between not
calculating the end time and remaining alert makes most sense when v 36 is
understood to complement rather than modify or contradict v 34 As Luz notes lsquoFor
Matthew the uncertainty of the time does not negate its nearness which vv 33-34 had
announcedhellip only the two statements together can bring the church to that attitude of
ldquowatchingrdquo (v 42) that the evangelist wants to urge on his readersrsquo Likewise 61
Davies and Allison consider that v 36 lsquodoes not contradict v 34 Rather does the
uncertainty of v 36 interpret the certainty of the earlier verse although the end will
come upon lsquothis generationrsquo its exact time cannot be fixedrsquo In this regard 62
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse is similar to the contemporary apocalyptic text 2
This would produce the illogical statement lsquothe Son of man is coming at an unexpected comingrsquo58
Oddly Davies and Allison donrsquot follow through this logic and state simply that lsquothat dayrsquo is the OTrsquos 59
lsquoday of the Lordrsquo which in the NT is the parousia and lsquothat hourrsquo is a further specification that is ef-fectively synonymousrsquo In their footnotes they then reference v 44 and 2513 - the very verses that suggest against this reading Davies and Allison 1997 378
Dan 11-12 Testament of Moses 1012 Apocalypse of Abraham 2860
Luz 1989 21361
Davies and Allison 1997 37862
22
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Baruch which combines an imminent expectation of the end with a declaration that
only God knows when that time will come 63
Beasley-Murrayrsquos reading of the parallel verses in Mark is of interest because he
acknowledges that he has come to reject his former (and the majority) view that Mk
1332 ( Mt 2436) reflects relative ignorance of the precise timing Beasley-Murray
justifies a separation of the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo on the basis that lsquoin the
tradition [the day of the Lord on Jerusalem (the tribulations)] is clearly distinguished
from the parousia and coming of the saving sovereignty of Godrsquo In actual fact this 64
distinction is not so clear in the tradition and more importantly the judgments on
Jerusalem and lsquothe comingrsquo are not clearly distinguished in Mark and Matthewrsquos
eschatological discourses Furthermore Beasley-Murray seeks to let v 32 (= Mt
2436) lsquostand on its own feetrsquo as a reference to the unknown time of the end To
interpret lsquothat day or hourrsquo in these broad terms (not as units of time) he reads this
phrase in light of the tradition of lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo Doing so reveals a 65
fundamental contradiction in his interpretation on the one hand he justifies a
separation between the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo because lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo is
understood as judgment but not the end yet on the other hand lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo
alluded to in v 36 refers to the end
A fundamental reason to reject v 36 as communicating absolute ignorance of the
timing of the end is that such a statement would lead Jesus to undercuts his own
The end is imminent in 2 Baruch 821-2 Baruch asks God regarding the timing of the end in 2 63
Baruch 2219-25 and is given a cryptic answer in 2 Baruch 22-23
Beasley-Murray 1993 45864
Beasley-Murray 1993 457-865
23
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
declaration that the parousia is at the very gates According to the absolute ignorance
view that announcement in v 29 must be tempered by the understanding that Jesus is
not in fact qualified to make such a statement (at least it carries no temporal
indications) All the evidence points in favour of v 36 complementing v 34 by
announcing that the precise time of the end is unknown and not to be calculated but
will nevertheless arrive within the lifetime of that generation
Summary
Matthewrsquos use of γενεὰ elsewhere in his gospel and the meaning of דור which the
LXX translates as γενεὰ suggest that Jesusrsquo prophecy in Mt 2434 refers to his
contemporaries specifically This interpretation makes this verse particularly
pertinent to Matthewrsquos first audience and is supported by the discoursersquos focus on
events in the first-century principally the destruction of the Temple The antecedent
for πάντα ταῦτα is ambiguous although this is not significant for the eschatological
timing expectations of the verse On the one hand by association with the πάντα
ταῦτα in the previous verse lsquoall these thingsrsquo may refer to all the tribulations which
precede lsquothe comingrsquo Since lsquothe comingrsquo follows immediately on from these
tribulations a statement about the broad timing of those tribulations is also by
implication a statement about the timing of lsquothe comingrsquo On the other hand πάντα
ταῦτα could include lsquothe comingrsquo so that just as v 33 refers to the tribulations (in
πάντα ταῦτα) and lsquothe comingrsquo (in ἐγγύς ἐστιν) v 34 also refers to both of these
events Jesusrsquo statement in v 34 therefore either implicitly or explicitly expects lsquothe
comingrsquo within the lifetime of his contemporaries There is no reasonable way to
extend the timeframe of this expectation beyond the first generation and the
progression of the discourse does not accommodate long periods of delay The notion 24
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
of prophetic perspective is unconvincing because it is not suggested by the text and
demands that we go beyond the text to expect lsquothe comingrsquo in the future when the
discourse requires that this be fulfilled within the first generation Mt 2436
complements the broad timeframe in v 34 by making it clear that the precise moment
of the end is not known and should not be calculated Thus in Mt 2434 Jesus
emphatically states that within the lifetime of his contemporaries the tribulations and
lsquothe comingrsquo described will be fulfilled This raises two important questions what 66
was lsquothe comingrsquo and did it happen within a generation
Cf 1 Cor 155166
25
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
PART II THE NATURE OF ESCHATOLOGY IN Mt 2434
2 a) What was lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo
The phrase lsquothe Son of Man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον) on the clouds of heavenrsquo (Mt 2430)
is commonly understood to be a reference to Christrsquos end-time parousia It is
described in the dramatic language of cosmic portents (v 29) will happen lsquowith
power and great gloryrsquo (v 30) and involves the gathering of the elect by his angels (v
31) Until this point the phrase has been abbreviated as rsquothe comingrsquo and not lsquothe
parousiarsquo because a number of scholars deny that the parousia is in view Instead they
consider that lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is used metaphorically as a reference to
the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple in 70 CE In this case the climax
of the discourse is the eschatological lsquoday of the Lordrsquo as judgement in the events of
history - but not as the end of history For Hatina this section is thus a metaphor for
judgement against the Temple hierarchy For R T France Jesus understood lsquothe 67
comingrsquo to refer to his future exaltation (after death) into a reign which manifest itself
in the judgement of Jerusalem For N T Wright lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo is 68
a metaphor for the vindication of the message of Jesus the destruction of the Temple
is a fitting sign that the functions of the Temple (as the place of worship and presence
of God) are now fulfilled in Jesus and that the church is the new Israel 69
Reading lsquothe comingrsquo as a metaphor for events in the first century has the advantage
that Mt 2434 can be affirmed as not containing error For Wright lsquohere we have the
Hatina 1996 4367
France 1971 14568
Wright 1996 36269
26
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
solution to the problem of the timing of the kingdomhellip Already present in Jesusrsquo
ministry and climactically inaugurated in his death and resurrection the divine
kingdom will be manifest within a generation when Jesus and his followers are
vindicated in and through the destruction of Jerusalemrsquo The question however 70
must be asked is reading Mt 2429-31 without the parousia justified
lsquoThe comingrsquo as judgement in history the use of OT language
The principle basis for reading lsquothe comingrsquo of Mt 2429-31 as a reference to
judgement in history is the understanding of Matthewrsquos use of traditional language
from the OT In particular v 29 draws on Isa 1310 in its description of the heavenly
bodies and appears to be further influenced by imagery from Isa 344 in announcing
that both lsquothe stars will fall from heavenrsquo (cf LXX) and that lsquothe powers of heaven 71
will be shakenrsquo (cf LXX B and Theod) Furthermore Joel 210 and 415-16 may 72
have influenced the alternative order of the heavenly bodies 73
Mt 2429 Immediately after the suffering of
those days
the sun will be darkened
and the moon will not give its light
the stars will fall from heaven
and the powers of heaven will be shaken
Isa 1310 For the stars of the heavens and their
constellations
will not give their light
the sun will be dark at its rising
and the moon will not shed its light
Wright 1996 365 also France 2002 50170
The LXX of Isa 344 has πάντα τὰ ἄστρα πεσεῖται (lsquoall the stars shall fallrsquo) Gundry 1967 51-271
LXX B and Theod have καὶ τακήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάmicroεις τῶν οὐρανῶν (lsquoand all the powers of the 72
heavens shall meltrsquo)
Joel 210 415-16 share the same order of lsquosun moon starsrsquo73
27
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Caird followed by Hatina France and Wright emphasises that the language of
cosmic upheaval is commonly used in the OT to describe the judgement of God
against nations within the events of history For Caird lsquoin [Mark 13] as in the book
of Danielhellip the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of heaven was never
conceived as a primitive form of space travel but as a symbol for a mighty reversal of
fortunes within history and at the national levelrsquo Hatina highlights that Isa 1310 74
describes the darkening of the sun moon and stars in the context of an oracle against
Babylon as evidenced by the superscript (Isa 131) and wider discourse (Isa
131-1423) The focus on Babylon leads Hatina to consider that lsquothe cosmic
universal-type language [of Isa 1310] is used figuratively to describe the demise of a
political entity within history It is not a reference to the closing act of historyrsquo 75
Likewise Isa 344 is part of an oracle of judgment against Edom which also notably
includes a divine gathering of the elect after the destruction (Isa 3416-17 cf Mt
2431)
However others consider that the local references in Isa 13 and 34 do not mean that
the descriptions of global and cosmic catastrophe are necessarily metaphors for local
judgement For Adams this language of globalcosmic catastrophe is lsquobest explained
in terms of a strategy of particularisation which grounds the announcement of
impending local judgement in the genuine expectation of ultimate universal
Caird 1965 20-2 adapted in Caird and Hurst 1994 365f Cf Hatina 1996 54 See also Hoffmann 74
the meaning of lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo in OT usage metamorphosed over time but was lsquonever a non-es-chatological termrsquo Hoffmann 1981 50
Hatina 1996 5575
28
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
judgement by global or cosmic catastrophersquo Adams notes that in Isa 13 and 34 the 76
narrowing in on Babylon and Edom respectively comes after descriptions of
worldwide judgement (Isa 1311 342) described in cosmic proportions (Isa 1310
344) As such lsquothe language of global and cosmic catastrophe could not be taken as
metaphorical for local socio-political upheaval it would form part of a description of
universal judgement which is subsequently (or was previously) localised within the
larger oraclersquo 77
The debate over whether the language of cosmic catastrophe in the key texts behind
Mt 2434 is metaphor for local judgement is not settled by other OT usage of this
language In some cases cosmic catastrophe language is best understood as metaphor
for judgement in history whereas in other cases it evidently has a universal and 78
eschatological reference This variety of use means that linguistic arguments alone 79
are not sufficient to settle whether the cosmic upheaval in Mt 2429 includes or
excludes the parousia
Indications from apocalyptic texts and related writings
It is important to note that even if the cosmic language of Isa 13 and 34 could be
proven to be metaphor for local judgement in history this does not mean that
Matthew necessarily used the traditional language in the same way For Adams lsquoit
was probably the immediate context of the prophetic verses the connection with
Adams is not dogmatic and concedes thatrsquoWright may be rightrsquo regarding metaphorical globalcos76 -mic catastrophe language in Isa 13 and 34 However while debatable for this period Adams insists that this language is not metaphorical in post-biblical Jewish apocalyptic and related sources Adams 2007 156
Adams 2007 15677
eg Ezek 327-8 and Amos 89 Hatina 1996 5678
eg Isa 24-2779
29
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
worldwide judgement rather than the wider context and the subsequent targeting of a
city which prompted the use of themrsquo Crucially in post-biblical Jewish 80
apocalyptic and related sources the language of cosmic and global catastrophe was
employed to mean universal eschatological judgement Wrightrsquos view that cosmic 81
language in these latter sources remains focused on socio-political upheavals is
unsustainable given that these texts regularly lack reference to cities or nations 82
France who acknowledges an lsquoend of historyrsquo sense in these texts prefers a
diachronic approach where the purported lsquotraditionalrsquo meaning is more determinative
for the evangelists than the meaning in more contemporary texts However a 83
synchronic comparison between the use of cosmic language in Matthew and
apocalyptic and related texts is justified and is the most illuminating
Indications from apocalyptic and related sources
Regardless of the debates and challenges around describing texts as apocalyptic
(including Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse) or even defining the Apocalypse 84
genre it is evident that by the first-century CE a body of post-biblical Jewish 85
literature existed which could be related according to common motifs and features 86
Debate over whether Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse should be called
Adams 2007 15780
Adams gives a range of references including those where cosmic portents are preliminary to the 81
End 1 En 804-8 and LAB 1913 (both part of lsquodrawn-out process of cosmic expirationrsquo) 4 Ezra 54b-5 (with the fall of stars in Ethiopic version) Sib Or 3796-804 5346-349 Also references which de-scribe cosmic events as part of the catastrophic end 1 En 13b-9 1021-3 1 QH 1119-36 T Mos 103-6 2 Bar 321 Apoc Zeph 125-8 Sib Or 3675-681 Adams 2007 158
Adams 2007 159 82
France 2002 532-383
Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse has unconvincingly been called a lsquofarewell speechrsquo but it lacks 84
reference to Jesusrsquo death Hooker 1991 297
See Collins 1984 ch 1 for more on the debates85
Semeia 14 1979 and Koch 197286
30
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
lsquoapocalypticrsquo has focused on whether it fulfils given criteria for Apocalypse genre 87
However in terms of generic allusions which indicate the meaning intended by the
language Matthew uses it would be more helpful to consider the insights of critical
theory on discourse to see that Matthew is free to adopt and adapt what Emma
Wasserman calls lsquoa set of shared concepts language motifs metaphors and
assumptions about their relationships that enable and constrain intellectual
productionrsquo The important point is not whether we can tick off every item in a 88
checklist of Apocalypse genre but rather that Matthewrsquos discourse has sufficient 89
commonalities to consider that he writes at least this discourse within the broad
stream of apocalyptic Matthewrsquos text shares the features of what David Sim calls
lsquoapocalyptic eschatologyrsquo lsquoa religious perspective which can be found both within
and without the apocalyptic genrersquo Sim identifies lsquoeight major characteristicsrsquo of 90 91
apocalyptic eschatology and finds that Matthew lsquoembraces a comprehensive
apocalyptic-eschatological world view which includes and emphasises all the eightrsquo 92
This commonality would have likely provided cues to Matthewrsquos audience that in the
absence of evidence to the contrary this cosmic language referred to the apocalyptic
end of history In fact far from indicating that Matthew intended to subvert the
common currency of this language the wider evidence from Matthewrsquos Gospel
Cf Horsley 1993 22487
Wasserman 2008 39388
eg Christopher Rowland writes lsquothe present form of the chapter makes it difficult to justify the de89 -scription of it as apocalypticrsquo Rowland 1982 43
Sim 1996 7090
Apocalyptic eschatology is 1) dualistic 2) deterministic It concentrates on 3) eschatological rever91 -sal in the 4) immediate future It is concerned with 5) the lead up to the End 6) the arrival of a saviour figure and 7) the final and universal judgement which brings about 8) rewards and punishments See Sim 1996 70ff
Sim 1996 17592
31
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
reveals a consistent apocalyptic expectation As Davies and Allison note 93
lsquoMatthewrsquos last major discourse is the only discourse to treat eschatology exclusively
But each of the other major discourses - 5-7 10 13 18 - concludes by turning to the
last thingshellip This reflects the conviction that the meaning of Matthewrsquos story is
determined not only by its literary ending but by the ending of history itselfrsquo 94
Matthewrsquos apocalyptic emphasis is a point of similarity between his community and
the Dead Sea sect which in the view of J J Collins lsquowas an apocalyptic
communityrsquo Collins highlights that the expression of apocalypticism may vary 95
between groups but lsquowhat is crucialhellip is the belief that its way of life is in accordance
with the angels in heaven that it will be vindicated in a final judgement and that it
will lead its members to everlasting lifersquo All of these features are represented in 96
Matthewrsquos discourse 97
A supporting argument from the direction of travel
In addition to his view of the traditional use of OT language Wright makes a
supporting argument to exclude the parousia based on the direction of travel of lsquothe
Son of manrsquo Wright notes that lsquothe Son of man coming on the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2429) is
a reference to Daniel 7 in which the lsquoson of manrsquo figure ascends to the throne of the
Ancient of Days lsquoHe comes from earth to heaven vindicated after sufferingrsquo 98
Guumlnther Bornkamm notes that Matthewrsquos understanding of the Church is lsquofashioned in expectation 93
of the coming judgementrsquo and that this end-expectation runs lsquothrough his whole Gospelrsquo Bornkamm 1963 16
Davies and Allison 1997 36994
For Collins lsquothe primary evidence is found in the major sectarian compositionshellip[which] are not in 95
the form of apocalypses but they are informed by an apocalyptic worldview and influenced by the apocalypses of Enoch and Danielrsquo Collins 1997 150
Collins 1997154 Cf also Collins 1998 1396
Accordance with the angels (Mt 2431) vindicated in final judgement (esp Mt 2531ff) everlast97 -ing life (Mt 2546)
Wright 1996 36198
32
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
However this argument is unconvincing as evidence against lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo referring to the eschatological parousia In the other verse where Matthew 99
uses the Danielic form lsquocoming in the cloudsrsquo (Mt 2664) the high priests are told by
Jesus that they lsquowill see the Son of Man seated at the right hand of Power and coming
on the clouds of heavenrsquo The phrasing here implies that lsquothe comingrsquo is understood
to be earthward since it occurs after heavenly enthronement rather than before 100
Furthermore Mt 1928 and 2531 make it is clear that for Matthew the enthronement
of the Son of Man is an event which occurs in the eschatological future and is
associated with the end-time judgement of all Futhermore in Mt 1626 we see 101
that Jesus understands that the Son of man will come lsquowith his angelsrsquo (not into the
presence of the angels) lsquoin gloryrsquo (not to receive glory) and for the purpose of
judgment (that is at the end of history)
If further evidence were needed to demonstrate an earthward use of Dan 713 it can
be seen elsewhere in the NT and in apocalyptic and related texts Rev 17 clearly
applies Dan 713 to Jesusrsquo return as a lsquocoming with the cloudsrsquo from heaven to earth
Furthermore Adams has argued that the apocalyptic texts 1 Enoch 37-71 and 4 Ezra
131-13 make use of Dan 713 in their descriptions of humanlike figures In both 102
of these texts the figure has an active eschatological role and in neither text does the
Collins even highlights that the direction of travel is not actually clear in Daniel Collins 1993 311-99
12 Casey considers that lsquothe movement is downwards in the original Danielic text and this interpreta-tion was preserved by both the Jews and Christians of whom the latter saw here the parousia of Jesusrsquo Casey 1979 171
See also Maurice Casey lsquoThe whole of Mark 13 up to this point takes place on earthhellip if the Son of 100
man then comes he must come towards themrsquo Casey 1979 171
Cf Davies and Allison 1997 531 nt 77 France recognises that Mt 2531ff has an eschatological 101
application but insists that this is part of a heavenly judgement scene rather than an earthward lsquocoming of the Son of manrsquo France 1971 144
Adams 2005a102
33
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
humanlike figure come to God to receive glory These apocalyptic texts demonstrate
that Dan 713 was open to re-interpretation by first-century Jewish groups and while
not corresponding directly to a NT understanding of the coming as parousia offer a
partial parallel with the eschatological coming of God in judgment of the world 103
Accounting for Matthewrsquos use of παρουσία
Arguing that lsquothe comingrsquo does not refer to the parousia is especially difficult with
Matthewrsquos discourse since unlike the Markan and Lukan versions Matthew uses the
word παρουσία (four times 243 27 37 and 39) Wright and France deal with this in
different ways Wright accounts for it by considering that the word παρουσία lsquomeans
lsquopresencersquo as opposed to apousia lsquoabsencersquo hence it denotes the lsquoarrivalrsquo of
someonehellip and it is especially used in relation to the visit lsquoof a royal or official
personagersquorsquo However as France notes this view lsquois unconvincing in view of the 104
fact that by the time Matthewhellip wrote his gospel the word had become a recognised
technical term for Jesusrsquo second comingrsquo Furthermore France highlights that 105
Matthewrsquos extension of the discourse in chapter 25 makes it clear that Matthewrsquos text
does address lsquothe time of final and universal judgmentrsquo and not just the destruction 106
of Jerusalem
Adams 2005a 47103
Wright 1996 341104
France 2002 501 Adams notes further that lsquoThe word is found 24 times in the New Testament 105
Only 7 cases are non-eschatological (1 Cor 1617 2 Cor 76 7 1010 Phil 126 212) Adams 2007 167 nt 178
France 2002 501 His point is well made apart from saying that this end time focus comes lsquoafter v 106
36rsquo While the material in ch 25 does suggest end-time events and so corroborate the understanding of parousia it doesnrsquot indicate at which point in ch 24 these events come into view
34
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
France recognises the reference to the universal judgement and the parousia in Mt 24
but excludes it from vv 29-31 based on his view that the discussion of end-time
events doesnrsquot begin until v 36 France considers that lsquobut of that day and hourrsquo (v
36) lsquomarks a deliberate change of subject from lsquothese thingsrsquo which have been
discussed in vv 33-34rsquo For France the disciplesrsquo two-part question in v 3 has two 107
separate and consecutive answers firstly lsquowhen will this [destruction of the Temple]
bersquo is answered in vv 4-35 including the concrete answer lsquowithin a generationrsquo
secondly lsquowhat will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the agersquo is
answered from v 36ff and includes the answer that this timing is unknown France 108
considers that the word parousia which is picked up in v 37 and v 39 lsquohas been
conspicuously absent from vv 4-35 (except to state in v 27 that the parousia is to be
distinguished from the period then under discussion) However France overstates 109
his argument regarding the location of the word parousia in the discourse Firstly the
absence of this word from the majority of the discourse is as we would expect given
that it deals mostly with the events leading up to the parousia Secondly the 110
correspondence between the dramatic description of the parousia in v 27 (lsquoas the
lightning comes from the east and flashes as far as the westrsquo) and the dramatic events
of lsquothe comingrsquo in vv 29-31 is highly suggestive and makes it difficult not to associate
these two Furthermore France does not give a good account of the introduction to v
France 1985 347 France reads περὶ δέ as adversative but among the NT examples he gives ne107 -glects to mention the other instances in Mark and Matthewrsquos Gospels where this is not the case Fur-thermore the distinction he highlights between lsquothat dayrsquo and lsquothose days of tribulationrsquo is not signifi-cant it is the difference between the events leading up to the parousia and the parousia itself and car-ries no implication of temporal separation France 2002 501
France 1985 337 By contrast France with Wright reads both parts of the Markan disciplesrsquo ques108 -tion (Mk 134) as referring to the fall of the Temple Cf Wright 2001 178 France 2002 506-7
France 1985 347109
We might add that even in the run up to the parousia this event is looming as in the announcements 110
of the false Messiahs and false prophets vv 24-2535
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
29 lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In Francersquos understanding lsquothe
comingrsquo is a metaphor for the divine effect of the suffering of those days (including
the destruction of the Temple) - not a additional event lsquoafter the suffering of those
daysrsquo
lsquoThe comingrsquo as parousia
The arguments against the reference to the parousia in Mt 2429-31 are unpersuasive
we now turn to the arguments in favour Evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and his
wider Gospel from elsewhere in the NT and from apocalyptic and related texts all 111
supports the understanding of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia of Christ
In Matthewrsquos discourse France draws too much significance from the observation
that in lsquothe Son of man coming (ἐρχόmicroενον)rsquo (v 30) lsquothe word parousia is not
usedrsquo In fact it is evident in the Matthean discourse itself that Matthew uses 112
cognates of ἐρχόmicroενον and παρουσίαν interchangeably including in the section which
France considers to be about the end-time parousia (v 36ff) Here lsquothe example of
Noahrsquo is compared with the ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ (lsquothe coming of the Sonrsquo) and the
parenetic conclusion is given lsquotherefore you also must be ready for the Son of Man is
coming (ἔρχεται) at an unexpected hourrsquo (v 42) Likewise Matthew uses a derivative
of ἔρχοmicroαι when he introduces the end-time judgement of the nations with lsquoWhen the
Son of Man comes (ἔλθῃ) in his gloryrsquo (Mt 2531) Matthew evidently uses both
ἐρχόmicroενον (v 30) and παρουσία (vv 27 36 37) with regard to the same end-time
Wider references from Matthewrsquos Gospel support a picture of lsquothe coming of the Son of Manrsquo as a 111
descent from heaven of the previously exalted and enthroned Christ coming in judgement at the end of age (cf Mt 1626 1928 2531 2664)
France 1985 344112
36
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
lsquocomingrsquo of the Son of Man His reason for varying the language is perfectly
explicable when it is noted that his use of ἐρχόmicroενον in 2430 is within a quotation
from Dan 7 (LXX) Matthewrsquos discourse nevertheless associates this clearly with the
parousia since he places this quotation in between the uses of παρουσία (v 27 37 and
39) and describes lsquothe coming of the Son of manrsquo in dramatic ways that relate to his
description of the parousia (v 27) 113
Further cause for reading lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia comes from the disciplesrsquo
question which clearly anticipates the end of history Not only do the disciples
explicitly ask about the parousia but this is associated with lsquothe end of the agersquo
Rather than considering that the two parts of the disciplesrsquo question are distinct and
require a lsquochange of subjectrsquo it makes better sense to note that the one statement of
Jesus generated two connected questions from the disciples This implies that the
destruction of the Temple and the parousia were related in the minds of the disciples
Jesusrsquo reply confirms their assumption by describing tribulations which culminate in
the desolating sacrilege and which are followed immediately by lsquothe Son of man
comingrsquo Wright denies the end-time reference in the disciplesrsquo questions by
considering that συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquothe end of the agersquo) refers to lsquothe end of
Israelrsquos period of mourning and exilersquo This interpretation is unwarranted since as 114
Adams notes lsquothe phrase συντελεια του αιωνος is found several times in Matthewrsquos
Gospel and very clearly refers to the close of human history coinciding with the final
judgement (1339 40 49)rsquo This end-time reference and not the destruction of the 115
The book of Revelation provides further evidence that early Christians used ἔρχοmicroαι in relation to 113
the end-time coming of Jesus Cf Rev 14 18 (ἐρχόmicroενος) 17 (ἔρχεται) 216 311 1615 227 2212 2220 (ἔρχοmicroαι)
Wright 1996 346114
Adams 2007168115
37
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Temple is especially evident in Jesusrsquo promise to be with the disciples lsquoto the end of
the agersquo (Mt 2820)
Evidence from elsewhere in the NT suggests that lsquothe coming of the Son of man on
the cloudsrsquo should be understood as a parousia reference Maurice Casey notes 116 117
that the NT consistently attests to lsquobelief in the return of Jesus as an event often
referred to as his comingrsquo Paul demonstrates that Christians in the first century 118
already understood the parousia as a coming of Christ from heaven in Danielic terms
In 1 Thess 415-17 he describes the end-time lsquocoming (παρουσίαν) of the Lordrsquo as a
descent from heaven and a meeting of the faithful with Jesus lsquoin the cloudsrsquo (v 17) 119
Although hardly required further evidence that lsquothe comingrsquo relates to the parousia
comes from apocalyptic and related texts In addition to the evidence from 1 Enoch
and 4 Ezra for the reinterpretation of Dan 713 within apocalyptic eschatological
visions apocalyptic and related texts clearly relate periods of tribulation to the events
of the end As Adams notes lsquoin most examples of the schema which predate or are
close in time to Mark [and Matthew] the end-time tribulation or period of woes is
followed by an unmistakably lsquofinalrsquo eventrsquo The Testament of Moses is of particular 120
Regarding lsquoonrsquo (Mt 2430 2664 LXX Dan 713) lsquoinrsquo (Mk 1326) or lsquowithrsquo (Theod Dan 713 116
Rev 17) the clouds with Davies and Allison it is agreed that we should lsquohesitate to find theological differences in the stylistic variationsrsquo Davies and Allison 1997 361
For France and Wright such evidence is dismissed as it underlines the need to look outside the texts 117
and therefore suggest eisegesis France 2002 503 Wright 1992 462
Casey 1979 176118
Cf Rev 1414-15 where lsquoone like the Son of Manrsquo who is seated lsquoon the cloudrsquo appears for the har119 -vest when lsquothe earth is fully ripersquo (v 15)
Adams 2007 146 Adams notes lsquoGodrsquos eschatological advent (1 En 9015-19 917 T Mos 101-120
7) or his awesome intervention (Sib Or 6669-701) the day of judgement (1 En 1004) the destruction or re-creation of the cosmos (1 En 802-8 cf 721) In 4 Ezra and 2 Baruch the tribulation precedes the coming of the messiah 4 Ezra 51-13 613-25 etc 2 Bar 26-30 70 Regarding the 4 Ezra pas-sage Wright responds that lsquothere is interestingly a time-delay between the lionrsquos victory of the eagle and the final judgementrsquo Wright 2013 171
38
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
interest because like Matthew it alludes to the book of Daniel For Adams lsquolsquoit is
clear from the Testament of Moses that in the first century CE Daniel 12 was being
read in terms of the final time of trouble that marks the transition between the present
age and the age of blessednessrsquo By analogy with these apocalyptic and related 121
texts the tribulations in Matthewrsquos discourse (244-25) are eschatological woes As 122
such they anticipate just the sort of final event that we have if lsquothe coming of the Son
of manrsquo in vv 29-31 is the parousia of Christ for end-time judgement
In summary in part I it was shown that in Mt 2434 Jesus is said to expect
tribulations (including the destruction of the Temple) and also either explicitly or
implicitly lsquothe comingrsquo within the timeframe of his contemporary generation These
events were near in the view of Jesus and had become imminent for Matthewrsquos
audience who must remain alert and watch out because the precise moment of lsquothe
comingrsquo is known only to God the Father In part II it has been argued that this
lsquocomingrsquo is the parousia which Matthew further describes in vv 37ff Finally it is
asked what does the parousia entail and is it possible that it did happen as predicted
within a generation
2 b) The nature of lsquothe comingrsquo as the parousia
Matthewrsquos description of the parousia suggests that this is an event which brings
about the end of the age This arrival of the Son of Man will be preceded (or 123
accompanied) by cosmic upheaval (2429) a sign in the sky (2430) and will involve
Adams 2007 140-1121
Rowland 1982 43 Also Sim 1996 42-3122
For Adams the catastrophic cosmic upheavals lsquoboth announce and accompany the eschatological 123
comingrsquo Adams 2007 159 Cf Hooker 1991 301-239
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
the enthronement of the Son of Man in his judgement seat (2531) lsquoAll the tribes of
the earthrsquo will witness and mourn his arrival (2430) and there will be an angelic
gathering of lsquothe electrsquo (2431) There will be judgment and condemnation of the
wicked lsquoas in the days of Noahrsquo (2437) where lsquoone will be taken and one will be leftrsquo
(2441-42) in a separation (2532) of people from lsquoall the nationsrsquo (2532) The
judgment will result in either eternal punishment or for the righteous eternal life
(2546 2541) with a place in a prepared kingdom (2534) 124
Matthewrsquos discourse presents the coming of Jesus as the Son of Man for universal
judgment in the manner of the coming of God The imagery which is associated with
lsquothe comingrsquo (including clouds power and glory angels and a gathering of the elect)
is the imagery of OT theophany For Davies and Allison lsquoJesusrsquo coming is the 125
arrival of Godrsquos gloryrsquo Once again Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse conforms 126
to a common pattern in apocalyptic and related writings since these texts often relate
the coming of God to the end of history For Adams lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia 127
represents a lsquolsquoChristologizationrsquo of the eschatological hope of the coming of Godrsquo 128
While the OT texts which are directly behind the eschatological discourses are not
theophanic they do refer to lsquothe day of the Lordrsquo which as Adams notes was lsquoto a
Furthermore in the context of this discourse the saying that lsquoheaven and earth will pass away but 124
my words will not pass awayrsquo (2435) may reflect a literal expectation of the dissolution of the cosmos
See Adams 2007 151 for multiple references125
Davies and Allison 1997 357126
Adams notes that lsquoGodrsquos advent is clearly envisioned as the final intervention and is associated with 127
the last judgment (eg in 1 En 13-9 917 1004 T Mos 101-10) the appearance of the kingdom (T Mos 101-10) the resurrection of the dead (LAB 1912-13) and the transformation of creation (1 Jub 127-29) Adams 2007 150 nt 101
Adams 2007 133128
40
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
large extent fused with the idea of Godrsquos coming or the eschatological theophany in
Jewish apocalyptic and associated writingsrsquo 129
The language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo including the darkening of the sun and
moon and the falling of the stars from heaven may or may not be taken literally 130
Adams summarises the wide range of views regarding the meaning of the cosmic
language associated with lsquothe comingrsquo in Mk 1324-25 [= Mt 2429] and notes that
lsquomost favour a non-literal reading but there is no clear consensus on to what the
language actually refersrsquo Adams highlights that lsquoin Jewish apocalyptic and related 131
writings Godrsquos catastrophic intervention does not usually result in the destruction of
the cosmos at least not explicitly it does so only in Apoc Zeph 125-8rsquo However 132
Adams considers it natural to associate lsquothe comingrsquo with the statement that lsquoheaven
and earth will pass awayrsquo (Mk 1331 Mt 2435) For Wright and France this
phrase is a metaphor which adds emphasis However as Sim points out even if the 133
purpose of the phrase is to add emphasis to lsquobut my words will not pass awayrsquo it
works because of an assumption about lsquothe ephemeral nature of the present orderrsquo 134
Given that Matthew is describing the end of the age and that earlier tribulations seem
to describe real events (wars earthquakes etc) it is reasonable (although not
Ibid 159129
NB having recognised that Matthewrsquos discourse wrongly expected the imminent end of history the 130
question of whether the language used to describe this end is literal or not is one of academic rather than practical importance
Whether literally figuratively as apocalyptic language for the eschaton as portenteous rather than 131
cataclysmic as accompanying the parousia as theophany language metaphorically as a reference to the passion and as socio-political upheaval See Adams 2007 139 for references
Adams 2007 160132
Wright 1996 365 France 2002 540133
Sim 1993 8134
41
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
essential) to expect that Matthew envisaged a real cosmic catastrophe with the
parousia 135
Conclusion
As part of Matthewrsquos eschatological discourse Jesus emphatically states that lsquotruly I
tell you this generation will not pass away until all these things have taken
placersquo (Mt 2434) This controversial statement with its synoptic parallels has raised
much debate with regard to the timing and nature of the eschatological events that it
describes This paper has shown that internal evidence from Matthewrsquos discourse and
wider Gospel supported by external evidence (especially Jewish apocalyptic and
related writings) leads to a confident interpretation of this verse Matthewrsquos Jesus
announces that both the eschatological woes and the parousia described earlier in the
discourse will take place within the lifetime of his contemporaries
It is notable that the confidence in this interpretation is based primarily on a close
reading of Matthewrsquos text The importance of internal evidence has been seen
throughout this study where the logic and structure of the discourse along with the
use of similar language elsewhere in Matthewrsquos Gospel points to the interpretation
given here In the case of γενεὰ alternative uses by Matthew provided evidence that
it is intended here to refer to lsquogenerationrsquo in the narrow sense In the case of πάντα
ταῦτα the logic of the discourse dictated that even if the phrase did not include lsquothe
comingrsquo this lsquocomingrsquo must still be expected within a generation This was evident
due to both the relationship between v 34 and v 33 (which made lsquothe comingrsquo near at
Cf 2 Pet 310 ff Whether Matthew literally expected the falling of the stars from heaven is less 135
important than the fact that evidence indicates an expectation of actual cosmic events42
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
the very gates within a generation) and the explicit temporal continuity between the
tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo In the case of lsquothe comingrsquo as parousia evidence from
Matthewrsquos discourse (the disciplesrsquo question the word παρουσία the dramatic
language and the later focus on universal judgement) along with other references in
Matthew to lsquothe comingrsquo and to enthroning for judgement all suggest that the lsquothe
Son of Man comingrsquo is a parousia reference
While the case from the internal evidence stands on its own external intertextual
evidence also supports the view that Matthewrsquos Jesus expected the end of the age
within the lifetime of his contemporaries Evidence has been drawn from other NT
texts which similarly use Dan 713 and which likewise indicate an expectation of
Jesusrsquo return Evidence from apocalyptic and related texts including Daniel and post-
biblical Jewish writings has been seen to be relevant due to the form of Matthewrsquos
discourse Conforming to the pattern of these texts Matthewrsquos discourse relates both
tribulations and the coming of God to the end of the age Matthew is also not unique
among these texts in presenting a Danielic human-like figure as an eschatological
agent There is no indication that Matthew intends to subvert the themes he shares
with apocalyptic writings but rather the latter support the view that Matthew
anticipates the end of the age The book of Daniel aside the OT texts related to
Matthewrsquos discourse are noteworthy as source material but ultimately a more
synchronic comparison with apocalyptic and related texts (including Daniel) is
deemed to be more illuminating since this is the discourse stream that likely informed
Matthew and his readers
43
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
In a number of cases redactional changes made by Matthew to the Markan discourse
play a key role in strengthening the interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here This is
most evident in Mt 2429 ( Mk 1324-25) where Markrsquos lsquoBut in those days after
that sufferingrsquo becomes lsquoImmediately after the suffering of those daysrsquo In this case
by making the tribulations and lsquothe comingrsquo continuous as Adams notes lsquoMatthew
only makes explicit what Mark impliesrsquo Further examples of redactional 136
clarification include Matthewrsquos explicit use of the word παρουσία and his changes to
the disciplesrsquo question In Markrsquos discourse the eschatological nature of the disciplesrsquo
question (Mk 134) is indicated by the allusion to Dan 126-7 in the phrase ταῦτα
συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (lsquoall these things [are about] to be accomplishedrsquo) This 137
eschatological focus is made explicit by Matthew with τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ
συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος (lsquoof your coming and of the end of the agersquo) Furthermore in
Matthewrsquos ch 25 extension to the discourse parables are used to develop the
parenetic purpose evident in Mark (esp Mk 1323) that the hearers should remain
alert due to the nearness of lsquothe comingrsquo This extended discourse also develops the
theme of judgement thus making it clear that the end of the age is in view 138
In each of these redactional changes Matthew clarifies (rather than changes) the sense
evident in Markrsquos discourse This observation suggests that Matthewrsquos redacted
eschatological discourse may be the key to the interpretation of the shorter and less
clear discourse in Mark The apparent ambiguity in Mark has been a source for much
scholarly ink and has been particularly conducive to confessionally driven attempts to
Adams 2007 168136
Ibid 140137
For Mark this is evident in 1327 lsquoThen he will send out the angels and gather his elect from the 138
four winds from the ends of the earth to the ends of heavenrsquo44
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
absolve Jesus or the Evangelist from error However the ambiguities are
overstated and the arguments presented here for the meaning of γενεὰ the timing 139
significance of the antecedent for πάντα ταῦτα and the relative nature of Jesusrsquo
ignorance apply equally well for the parallel verses in Mark This study has
deliberately focused on Matthewrsquos discourse since his redactions take what is the
most obvious interpretation of Markrsquos discourse and place it beyond any reasonable
doubt The suggestion here is that Matthewrsquos discourse supports those who read Mk
1330 as likewise revealing the expectation of the imminent apocalyptic parousia and
end of the age
The interpretation of Mt 2434 offered here along with the suggestion of a close
correspondence in meaning between the discourses in Matthew and Mark raises
important questions about the dating of these texts particularly in relation to 70 CE
If it is assumed that the fall of Jerusalem and destruction of the Temple are the climax
of the eschatological woes then Matthewrsquos lsquoimmediately after the sufferingrsquo (2429)
would suggest against the majority view a dating for Matthew not more than a few 140
years after 70 CE and quite possibly before Questions of the dating and temporal 141
relationship between Mark and Matthew deserve more space than is available here 142
Furthermore observations of the relationship between the eschatological discourses
Especially in Geddert 1989139
Duling 2010 298140
The most straightforward reading of lsquoimmediately afterrsquo would mean lsquoimmediately after the climax 141
- the destruction of the Templersquo This of course requires a pre-70 dating for Matthew However if after 70 CE a terminus ad quem could be argued from Matthew having a dependence on Dan 12 and assumption that the destruction of the Temple was the lsquodesolating sacrilegersquo which leaves a further 35 years (of suffering) until the end Contra Marxsen 1969 204
Notably the key argument that apparent animosity towards lsquothe Jewsrsquo in Matthew indicates a later 142
dating should be reevaluated given recent recognition of the diversity of first-century lsquoJudaismsrsquo and the conflict between these groups
45
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
of Matthew and Mark raise questions about how Lukersquos parallel discourse relates to
the other Synoptic Gospels Again further space is required to explore the similarities
and especially in this case differences between the eschatological discourses
The erroneous end-time expectations of Matthewrsquos Jesus have ramifications which
extend beyond the eschatological discourse since they are a key feature of the
apocalyptic worldview apparent throughout Matthewrsquos Gospel As such 143
Matthewrsquos eschatological perspective is of fundamental importance to interpreting the
words and actions of the Jesus he presents including the Kingdom of GodHeaven
sayings the nature of Jesusrsquo ethical exhortations the scope of election and 144 145
salvation and even the significance of Jesusrsquo death and resurrection 146 147
Furthermore just as Weiss recognised the gap between modern liberal sensibilities
and Jesus the apocalyptic prophet acknowledging that Matthewrsquos Jesus is
(mistakenly) dualistic and deterministic can have a negative impact on the appeal of
the Jesus character in his Gospel 148
For some the acknowledgement of such a significant and far reaching error may be a
fatal blow for the authority and thus revelation of Scripture However two different
For Schweitzer Matthewrsquos Jesus holds a konsequente (lsquoconsistentrsquo or lsquothoroughgoingrsquo) eschatology 143
(Schweitzer 1910 328ff) where lsquothe public ministry of Jesusrsquo was influenced by his escahtological perspective (Schweitzer 1910 350f)
For Weiss lsquothe establishment of the βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ will be mediated solely by Godrsquos supernat144 -ural interventionhellip For mankind and thus for Jesus also this means Pray that the Kingdom may comersquo This understanding of the Kingdom of God is applied throughout the Synoptics including the Lordrsquos Prayer and the Beatitudes Weiss 1971 82-3
Schweitzer writes of an Interimsethik Schweitzer 1910 349145
Ibid146
Allison 1985 169147
At least for those who are comfortable Alternatively dualist and deterministic portrayals of the 148
world can bring validation and comfort to those who struggle or who are oppressed46
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
types of response suggest ways forward for the confessional reader who views the NT
as authoritative Scripture and who neither denies nor downplays Matthewrsquos
apocalyptic Jesus The first response is to attempt to reach behind the text of 149
Matthew by attributing the error to Matthew or the early church and seeking to
recover the authentic Jesus contained within the NT This approach is exemplified by
some who hold a Realized Eschatology proponents of which have not traditionally
denied that Matthewrsquos discourse expects an imminent end of history but have
accounted for this as either a misapprehension of the words of Jesus by the early
church or as part of inauthentic additions to the words of Jesus Attempts to 150 151
determine the authenticity of Jesus logia depend heavily on source-criticism In this
vein debates over the significance of the Gospel of Thomas and the eschatological 152
emphasis of the Q source have led some scholars to argue that Jesus was not
apocalyptic in his message Rudolf Bultmannrsquos demythologising approach is an 153
alternative expression of reaching behind the text Bultmann acknowledged the
imminent apocalyptic expectation of the Synoptic Gospels but employed form-
criticism in order to recover the textrsquos gospel proclamation (kerygma) and so
lsquodemythologisersquo the early churchrsquos failure to appropriately express their existential
encounter with God through Christ 154
Contra Strauss the parousia is an apocalyptic event at the end of history Strauss 1860 658 Luz 149
downplays the apocalyptic emphasis in Matthew overall Luz 1989 204
For C H Dodd an early proponent of Realised Eschatology lsquolsquothe expectation of His early return 150
proved an illusion The Church was mistaken about the date of the great eventrsquo Notably in his early writing Dodd allowed for a future fulfilment for lsquothe comingrsquo Dodd 1951 6 20
Glasson 1947 63ff Robinson 1979 39 83f Cf Reimarus sect37 214151
Cf Crossan 1985 15-62 contra Meier 1991 127152
Crossan 1991 287ff153
Bultmann 1953 5 Bultmann 1957 47154
47
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Rather than reaching behind Matthewrsquos Gospel the second broad approach involves
moving forward from the perspective he presents a move not unprecedented within
the NT itself This is to consider that the Scriptures attest to variegated and
developing eschatological perspectives within the early church and to recognise that
the modern reader is not the first to have to grapple with the problem of the non-
return (as yet) of Christ As such it is a faith approach which is positioned in the
trajectory of the (very early) tradition of the church Following Hans Conzelmann a
number of scholars have argued that Luke-Acts presents a revision of early Christian
eschatology which lsquoabandoned belief in the early expectationrsquo and projected the 155
parousia into the distant future Accordingly it could be argued that while 156
Matthewrsquos discourse does not sustain an Inaugurated Eschatology for today Luke-157
Acts is more conducive to considering that the end-time events of universal
judgement are in the lsquonot-yetrsquo rather than the lsquonowrsquo the promise awaiting
fulfilment The lingering problem of Matthewrsquos error can be circumvented by 158
following the view of 2 Peter 3 in which the delayed parousia is accounted for by
recourse to different concepts of human and divine time where lsquowith the Lord one
day is like a thousand yearsrsquo Alternatively Joachim Jeremias and more recently 159 160
Dale Allison have emphasised the contingent and conditional nature of prophecy 161
Conzelmann 1960 117155
Hiers argues that even Luke expected an imminent parousia despite revising expectations to justify 156
the delay until his (later in the first-century) time Hiers 1974 146
NB Allison described the eschatology of Matthew as Inaugurated from the perspective (and expec157 -tation) of Matthew for whom Jesus had established the Kingdom of God and would come imminently to consummate history at the parousia This is not grounds for modern day Inaugurated eschatological expectations
Kuumlmmel 1957158
Contra Adams 2005b the prevailing understanding of the scofferrsquos question as related to the non-159
appearance of Christ is assumed At least this is the significant point for Peter for whom lsquothe Day of the Lordrsquo and parousia of Christ are contemporaneous
Jeremias 1971 139-41160
Allison 1985 175161
48
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
as a way of accounting for the non-fulfilment of Jesusrsquo declaration in Mt 2434 and
its parallels
The first of these two responses grounds authority in the notion of a recoverable
authentic Jesus in Scripture while the second regards authority in Christian tradition
after Matthew which is nevertheless apparent within Scripture To change 162
analogy whether excavating the textual stratigraphy beneath Matthew or building up
from Matthew according to early tradition Matthewrsquos Gospel is neither dispensed
with nor rejected Both approaches involve reflection on the wider canon of 163
Scripture but without attempting to present a harmonised canonical reading These
options are not without difficulties but an evaluation of the merits and issues with
these approaches requires more space than is available here The point is made
however that acknowledging Matthewrsquos mistaken apocalyptic Jesus need not be the
end of faith
This paper has shown that Matthewrsquos discourse erroneously expected the imminent
apocalyptic end of history with the parousia Whether this error belonged to Matthew
or Jesus and what either or both of these possibilities means for Scriptural authority
and our future hope are questions for further discussion What has been shown is that
Notably there have been those whose approach to faith places authority in Christian tradition after 162
the NT age - without depending on explicit Scriptural or pre-Scriptural witness Weiss himself exem-plified a separation of history from theology which enabled him to move beyond the perspective of an apocalyptic Jesus While Weiss considered that the Jesus of history held a redundant eschatological expectation he was also open to the positive potential of the Realized Eschatology of liberal Protes-tantism notably allowing for the perspective of his father-in-law Albrecht Ritschl (R H Hiers and D L Holland in Weiss 1971 17-24) Weiss concluded his famous work with the hope that lsquothis world will evermore become the showplace of the people of Godrsquo Weiss 1971 135 Similarly Schweitzer concludes that we should heed the call of him lsquowho comes to us as one unknownhellip He speaks to us the same word Follow thou merdquorsquo Schweitzer 1910 397
However recognition of erroneous eschatological expectations does entail a rejection of the notion 163
of Biblical inerrancy Chicago Statement 1978 289-290 See esp statement 4 of the summary state-ments
49
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
the statement of Matthewrsquos Jesus in Mt 2434 was explicitly or implicitly in error
what he told them he evidently didnrsquot tell them lsquotrulyrsquo
50
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams E 1997 lsquoHistorical Crisis and Cosmic Crisis in Mark 13 and Lucanrsquos Civil Warrsquo TynBul 482 329-44 2005a lsquoThe Coming of the Son of Man in Markrsquos Gospelrsquo TynBul 562 39-61 2005b lsquoldquoWhere is the Promise of his Comingrdquo The Complaint of the Scoffers in 2 Peter 34rsquo NTS 51 106-22 2007 The Stars will Fall from Heaven Cosmic Catastrophe in the New Testament and its World (LNTS 347 London and New York T amp T Clark International) Allison D C 1985 The End of the Ages has Come An Early Interpretation of the Passion and Resurrection of Jesus (Philadelphia Fortress Press) 1994 lsquoA Plea for Thoroughgoing Eschatologyrsquo JBL Vol 113 No 4 651-668 Ambrozic A M 1972 The Hidden Kingdom A Redactional-Critical Study of the References to the Kingdom of God in Markrsquos Gospel (Washington The Catholic Biblical Association of America) Bauckham R 1983 lsquoSynoptic Parousia Parables Againrsquo NTS 29 129-134 Beare F W 1981 The Gospel according to Matthew A Commentary (Oxford Basil Blackwell) Beasley-Murray G R 1983 lsquoSecond Thoughts on the Composition of Mark 13rsquo NTS 293 414-420 1993 Jesus and the Last Days The Interpretation of the Olivet Discourse (Peabody Massachusetts Hendrickson) Borg M J 1987 lsquoAn Orthodoxy Reconsidered The ldquoEnd-of-the-World Jesusrdquorsquo in L D Hurst and N T Wright (eds) The Glory of Christ in the New Testament Studies in Christology (Oxford Clarendon Press) 207-17 Bornkamm G 1963 lsquoEnd-Expectation and Church in Matthewrsquo in G Bornkamm G Barth and H J Held Tradition and Interpretation in Matthew (London SCM Press) 15ndash51 Bultmann R 1953 Kerygma and Myth a Theological Debate (Bultmann et al London SPCK) 1957 History and Eschatology The Gifford Lectures 1955 (Edinburgh The University Press) Brent A 2009 A Political History of Early Christianity (London and New York T amp T Clark International) Caird G B
51
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
1965 Jesus and God (with D E Jenkins London The Faith Press) 1980 The Language and Imagery (London Duckworth and Co) 1994 New Testament Theology (Completed and edited by L D Hurst New York Clarendon Press Oxford Oxford University Press) Casey M 1979 Son of Man The Interpretation and Influence of Daniel 7 (London SPCK) Collins A Y 1992 lsquoThe Eschatological Discourse of Mark 13rsquo in F Van Segbroeck et al (eds) The Four Gospels 1992 Festschrift Frans Neirynck (Leuven Leuven University Press) Collins J J 1979 (ed) Semeia 14 Apocalypse The Morphology of a Genre (Missoula MT Scholars Press) 1993 Daniel A Commentary on the Book of Daniel (Hermeneia Minneapolis Fortress) 1997 Apocalypticism in the Dead Sea Scrolls (London and New York Routledge) 1998 The Apocalyptic Imagination An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (Grand Rapids Eerdmans 2nd edn) Conzelmann H 1960 The Theology of St Luke (New York Harper Row) Cousar C B 1970 lsquoEschatology and Marks Theologia Crucis A Critical Analysis of Mark 13rsquo A Journal of Bible and Theology Vol24(3) 321-335 Cranfield C E B 1959 The Gospel According to Saint Mark An Introduction and Commentary (CGTC Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Crossan J D 1985 Four Other Gospels Shadows on the Contours of Canon (New York Winston) 1991 The Historical Jesus The Life of a Mediterranean Jewish Peasant (Edinburgh T amp T Clark) Davies W D and D C Allison 1997 The Gospel According to Saint Matthew (Vol 3 ICC Edinburgh TampT Clark) Dodd C H 1951 The Coming of Christ Four Broadcast Addresses for the Season of Advent (Cambridge Cambridge University Press) 1961 The Parables of the Kingdom (London CollinsFontana Books) Duling D C 2010 The Gospel of Matthew in D E Aune (ed) The Blackwell Companion to the New Testament (Chichester Wiley-Blackwell) Evans C A 2001 Mark 827-1620 (WBC 34B Nashville Thomas Nelson) Fletcher-Louis C 1997 lsquoThe Destruction of the Temple and the Relativization of the Old Covenant Mark 1331 and Matthew 518rsquo in K E Brower and
52
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
M W Elliot (eds) lsquoThe reader must understandrsquo Eschatology in Bible and Theology (Leicester Apollos) 145-69 France R T 1971 Jesus and the Old Testament His Application of Old Testament Passages to Himself and His Mission (London Tyndale) 1985 The Gospel According to Matthew An Introduction and Commentary (TNTC Leicester Inter-Varsity Press Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 2002 The Gospel of Mark A Commentary on the Greek Text (NIGTC Grand Rapids Eerdmans Carlisle Paternoster Press) Geddert T J 1989 Watchwords Mark 13 in Markan Eschatology (JSNTSup 26 Sheffield Sheffield Academic Press) Glasson T F 1947 The Second Advent The Origin of the New Testament Doctrine (London Epworth Press) 1980 Jesus and the End of the World (Edinburgh The Saint Andrew Press) Gundry R H 1967 The Use of the Old Testament in St Matthewrsquos Gospel with Special Reference to the Messianic Hope (Leiden E J Brill) 1993 Mark A Commentary on His Apology for the Cross (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) 1994 Matthew A Commentary on His Handbook for a Mixed Church under Persecution 2nd ed (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Hagner D A 1995 Matthew 14-28 (WBC 33B Dallas World Books) Hatina T R 1996 lsquoThe Focus of Mark 1324-27 The Parousia or the Destruction of the Templersquo BBR 643-66 Hiers R H 1974 lsquoThe Problem of the Delay of the Parousia in Luke-Actsrsquo NTS 202 145-155 Hirsch E D 1967 Validity in Interpretation (New Haven Yale University Press) Hoffmann Y 1981 lsquoThe Day of the Lord as a Concept and a Term in the Prophetic Literaturersquo ZAW 93 37-50 Hooker 1991 The Gospel According to St Mark (BNTC London A amp C Black) Horsley R 1993 lsquoWisdom and Apocalypticism in Markrsquo in L G Perdue B R Scott and W J Wiseman (eds) In Search of Wisdom Essays in Memory of John G Gammie (Louisville WestminsterJohn Knox Press) 223-244 Jeremias J 1971 New Testament Theology (trans J Bowden New York Sribnerrsquos) Koch K 1972 The Rediscovery of Apocalyptic (SBT 22 London SCM Press)
53
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
Kuumlmmel W G 1957 Promise and Fulfilment The Eschatological Message of Jesus (trans D M Barton London SCM Press) Ladd G E 1974 The Presence of the Future The Eschatology of Biblical Realism (London SPCK) Luz U 2001 Matthew 8-20 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) 1989 Matthew 21-28 A Commentary (trans J E Crouch Minneapolis Augsburg) Marcus J 1992 lsquoThe Jewish War and the Sitz im Leben of Markrsquo JBL Vol 111 No 3 441-62 2009 Mark 8-16 A New Translation with Introduction and Commentary (New Haven amp London Yale University Press) Marshall I H 1992 lsquoThe Parousia in the New Testament - and Todayrsquo in M J Wilkins and T Paige (eds) Worship Theology and Ministry in the Early Church Essays in Honor of Ralph P Martin (JSNTSup 87 Sheffield JSOT Press) 194-211 Martin G 2009 lsquoProcedural Register in the Olivet Discourse A Functional Linguistic Approach to Mark 13rsquo Biblica Filologia Neotestamentaria Vol 90 457-483 Marxsen W 1969 Mark the Evangelist studies on the redaction history of the Gospel (trans J Boyce et al Nashville and New York Abingdon Press) Meier J P 1991 A Marginal Jew Rethinking the historical Jesus Vol 1 (New York Doubleday) Moltmann J 1996 The Coming of God Christian Eschatology (trans M Kohl London SCM Press) Moore A L 1966 The Parousia in The New Testament (Leiden E J Brill) Morris L 1992 The Gospel According to Matthew (Grand Rapids Eerdmans) Mounce R H 1991 Matthew (New International Biblical Commentary 1 Grand Rapids Baker Books) Nineham D E 1968 The Gospel of St Mark (The Pelican Gospel Commentaries London A amp C Black rev edn) Otto R 2004 lsquoDealing with Delay A Critique of Christian Copingrsquo Biblical Theology Bulletin 34 150-160 Perry P S
54
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
2010 lsquoDisputing Enoch Reading Matthew 24 36-44 with Enochic Judaismrsquo Currents in Theology and Mission 376 451-459 Robinson J A T 1979 Jesus and His Coming Did the early Church misinterpret the original teaching of Jesus (London SCM Press) Rowland C 1982 Open Heaven Study of the Apocalyptic in Judaism and Early Christianity (London SPCK) Russell J S 1887 The Parousia A Critical Inquiry into the New Testament Doctrine of our Lordrsquos Second Coming (London T Fisher Unwin new edn) Schweitzer A 1910 The Quest of the Historical Jesus A Critical Study of its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (trans W Montgomery London A amp C Black First English Edition) Schweizer E 1976 The Good News According to Matthew (trans D E Green London SPCK) Sim D 1996 Apocalyptic Eschatology in the Gospel of Matthew (SNTS MS 88 Cambridge Cambridge University Press) Smalley S S 1964 lsquoThe Delay of the Parousiarsquo JBL 831 41-54 Strauss D F 1860 The Life of Jesus Critically Examined Vol II (trans M Evans New York Calvin Blanchard) Talbert C H (ed) 1970 Reimarus Fragments (ed C H Talbert trans R S Fraser Philadelphia Fortress Press) Various 1978 lsquoThe Chicago Statement on Biblical Inerrancyrsquo JETS 214 289-296 Wasserman E 2008 lsquoPaul among the Philosophers The Case of Sin in Romans 6ndash8rsquo JSNT 304 387-415 Weiss J 1971 Jesusrsquo Proclamation of the Kingdom of God (Lives of Jesus Series Philadelphia Fortress Press) Wenham D 1982 lsquo lsquoThis Generation will not passhelliprsquo A Study of Jesusrsquo future expectation in Mark 13rsquo in H H Rowdon (ed) Christ the Lord Studies in Christology presented to Donald Guthrie (Leicester Inter-Varsity Press) 127-150 1984 The Rediscovery of Jesusrsquo Eschatological Discourse (Gospel Perspectives 4 Sheffield JSOT Press) Whiston W 1892 The Works of Flavius Josephus (London Routledge) Wright N T
55
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56
1992 The New Testament and the People of God Christian Origins and the Question of God Vol1 (London SPCK) 1996 Jesus and the Victory of God (Christian Origins and the Question of God 2 London SPCK) 2013 Paul and the Faithfulness of God Parts I and II (London SPCK) 167ff
Electronic citations from Christian Classics Ethereal Library Calvin J Commentary on a Harmony of the Evangelists Matthew Mark Luke - Volume 3 lthttpwwwccelorgccelcalvincalcom33iixixhtmlgt [892014] Schaff P 1882 St Chrysostom Homilies on the Gospel of St Matthew in History of Christian Church 8 Vols lt h t t p w w w c c e l o r g c c e l s c h a f f npnf110iiiLXXIVhtmlfnf_iiiLXXIV-p132gt [8092014] 1885 The Clementia in Ante-Nicene Fathers Vol 8 lthttpwwwccelorgccelschaffanf08viivvixvhtmlgt [892014]
56